You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

12037 lines
328KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half of the output video.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is recognized by the
  93. @option{-filter}/@option{-vf}/@option{-af} and
  94. @option{-filter_complex} options in @command{ffmpeg} and
  95. @option{-vf}/@option{-af} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  96. @code{avfilter_graph_parse_ptr()} function defined in
  97. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  98. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  99. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  100. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  101. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  102. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  103. descriptions.
  104. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  105. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  106. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  107. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  108. the filter classes registered in the program.
  109. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  110. "=@var{arguments}".
  111. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  112. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
  113. @itemize
  114. @item
  115. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  116. @item
  117. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  118. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  119. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  120. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  121. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  122. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  123. @item
  124. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  125. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  126. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  127. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  128. @end itemize
  129. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  130. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  131. @samp{|}.
  132. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character @samp{'} as initial
  133. and ending mark, and the character @samp{\} for escaping the characters
  134. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  135. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  136. @samp{[]=;,}) is encountered.
  137. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  138. followed by a list of link labels.
  139. A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  140. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  141. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  142. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  143. associated to the output pads.
  144. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  145. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  146. created.
  147. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  148. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  149. For example in the filterchain
  150. @example
  151. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  152. @end example
  153. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  154. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  155. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  156. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  157. which are both unlabelled.
  158. In a filter description, if the input label of the first filter is not
  159. specified, "in" is assumed; if the output label of the last filter is not
  160. specified, "out" is assumed.
  161. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  162. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  163. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  164. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  165. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  166. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  167. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  168. to the filtergraph description.
  169. Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
  170. @example
  171. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  172. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  173. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  174. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
  175. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  176. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  177. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  178. @end example
  179. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  180. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  181. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  182. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  183. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  184. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  185. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  186. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  187. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  188. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  189. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  190. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  191. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  192. characters contained within it.
  193. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  194. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  195. @example
  196. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  197. @end example
  198. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  199. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  200. @example
  201. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  202. @end example
  203. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  204. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  205. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  206. @example
  207. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  208. @end example
  209. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  210. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  211. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  212. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  213. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  214. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  215. previous string will finally result in:
  216. @example
  217. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  218. @end example
  219. @chapter Timeline editing
  220. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  221. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  222. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  223. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  224. next filter in the filtergraph.
  225. The expression accepts the following values:
  226. @table @samp
  227. @item t
  228. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  229. @item n
  230. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  231. @item pos
  232. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  233. @item w
  234. @item h
  235. width and height of the input frame if video
  236. @end table
  237. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  238. to re-define the expression.
  239. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  240. rules.
  241. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  242. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  243. @example
  244. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  245. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  246. @end example
  247. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  248. @chapter Audio Filters
  249. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  250. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  251. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  252. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  253. build.
  254. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  255. @section adelay
  256. Delay one or more audio channels.
  257. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  258. The filter accepts the following option:
  259. @table @option
  260. @item delays
  261. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  262. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  263. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  264. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  265. @end table
  266. @subsection Examples
  267. @itemize
  268. @item
  269. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  270. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  271. @example
  272. adelay=1500|0|500
  273. @end example
  274. @end itemize
  275. @section aecho
  276. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  277. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  278. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  279. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  280. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  281. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  282. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  283. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  284. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  285. @table @option
  286. @item in_gain
  287. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  288. @item out_gain
  289. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  290. @item delays
  291. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  292. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  293. Default is @code{1000}.
  294. @item decays
  295. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  296. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  297. Default is @code{0.5}.
  298. @end table
  299. @subsection Examples
  300. @itemize
  301. @item
  302. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  303. @example
  304. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  305. @end example
  306. @item
  307. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  308. @example
  309. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  310. @end example
  311. @item
  312. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  313. @example
  314. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  315. @end example
  316. @item
  317. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  318. @example
  319. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  320. @end example
  321. @end itemize
  322. @section aeval
  323. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  324. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  325. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  326. It accepts the following parameters:
  327. @table @option
  328. @item exprs
  329. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  330. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  331. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  332. output channels.
  333. @item channel_layout, c
  334. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  335. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  336. use by default the same input channel layout.
  337. @end table
  338. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  339. @table @option
  340. @item ch
  341. channel number of the current expression
  342. @item n
  343. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  344. @item s
  345. sample rate
  346. @item t
  347. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  348. @item nb_in_channels
  349. @item nb_out_channels
  350. input and output number of channels
  351. @item val(CH)
  352. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  353. @end table
  354. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  355. dedicated filter.
  356. @subsection Examples
  357. @itemize
  358. @item
  359. Half volume:
  360. @example
  361. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  362. @end example
  363. @item
  364. Invert phase of the second channel:
  365. @example
  366. aeval=val(0)|-val(1)
  367. @end example
  368. @end itemize
  369. @section afade
  370. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  371. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  372. @table @option
  373. @item type, t
  374. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  375. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  376. @item start_sample, ss
  377. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  378. effect. Default is 0.
  379. @item nb_samples, ns
  380. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  381. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  382. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  383. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  384. @item start_time, st
  385. Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
  386. The value must be specified as a time duration; see
  387. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  388. for the accepted syntax.
  389. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample}.
  390. @item duration, d
  391. Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
  392. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  393. for the accepted syntax.
  394. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  395. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  396. the output audio will be silence.
  397. By default the duration is determined by @var{nb_samples}.
  398. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples}.
  399. @item curve
  400. Set curve for fade transition.
  401. It accepts the following values:
  402. @table @option
  403. @item tri
  404. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  405. @item qsin
  406. select quarter of sine wave
  407. @item hsin
  408. select half of sine wave
  409. @item esin
  410. select exponential sine wave
  411. @item log
  412. select logarithmic
  413. @item par
  414. select inverted parabola
  415. @item qua
  416. select quadratic
  417. @item cub
  418. select cubic
  419. @item squ
  420. select square root
  421. @item cbr
  422. select cubic root
  423. @end table
  424. @end table
  425. @subsection Examples
  426. @itemize
  427. @item
  428. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  429. @example
  430. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  431. @end example
  432. @item
  433. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  434. @example
  435. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  436. @end example
  437. @end itemize
  438. @anchor{aformat}
  439. @section aformat
  440. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  441. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  442. It accepts the following parameters:
  443. @table @option
  444. @item sample_fmts
  445. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  446. @item sample_rates
  447. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  448. @item channel_layouts
  449. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  450. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  451. for the required syntax.
  452. @end table
  453. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  454. Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
  455. @example
  456. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  457. @end example
  458. @section allpass
  459. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  460. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  461. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  462. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  463. The filter accepts the following options:
  464. @table @option
  465. @item frequency, f
  466. Set frequency in Hz.
  467. @item width_type
  468. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  469. @table @option
  470. @item h
  471. Hz
  472. @item q
  473. Q-Factor
  474. @item o
  475. octave
  476. @item s
  477. slope
  478. @end table
  479. @item width, w
  480. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  481. @end table
  482. @section amerge
  483. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  484. The filter accepts the following options:
  485. @table @option
  486. @item inputs
  487. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  488. @end table
  489. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  490. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  491. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  492. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  493. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  494. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  495. channels.
  496. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  497. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  498. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  499. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  500. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  501. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  502. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  503. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  504. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  505. shortest.
  506. @subsection Examples
  507. @itemize
  508. @item
  509. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  510. @example
  511. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  512. @end example
  513. @item
  514. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  515. @example
  516. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  517. @end example
  518. @end itemize
  519. @section amix
  520. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  521. Note that this filter only supports float samples (the @var{amerge}
  522. and @var{pan} audio filters support many formats). If the @var{amix}
  523. input has integer samples then @ref{aresample} will be automatically
  524. inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
  525. For example
  526. @example
  527. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  528. @end example
  529. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  530. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  531. It accepts the following parameters:
  532. @table @option
  533. @item inputs
  534. The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  535. @item duration
  536. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  537. @table @option
  538. @item longest
  539. The duration of the longest input. (default)
  540. @item shortest
  541. The duration of the shortest input.
  542. @item first
  543. The duration of the first input.
  544. @end table
  545. @item dropout_transition
  546. The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  547. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  548. @end table
  549. @section anull
  550. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  551. @section apad
  552. Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
  553. This can be used together with @command{ffmpeg} @option{-shortest} to
  554. extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  555. A description of the accepted options follows.
  556. @table @option
  557. @item packet_size
  558. Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
  559. @item pad_len
  560. Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
  561. value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
  562. exclusive with @option{whole_len}.
  563. @item whole_len
  564. Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
  565. the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
  566. the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
  567. with @option{pad_len}.
  568. @end table
  569. If neither the @option{pad_len} nor the @option{whole_len} option is
  570. set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
  571. indefinitely.
  572. @subsection Examples
  573. @itemize
  574. @item
  575. Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
  576. @example
  577. apad=pad_len=1024
  578. @end example
  579. @item
  580. Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
  581. the input with silence if required:
  582. @example
  583. apad=whole_len=10000
  584. @end example
  585. @item
  586. Use @command{ffmpeg} to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
  587. video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
  588. until the end in the output file when using the @option{shortest}
  589. option:
  590. @example
  591. ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
  592. @end example
  593. @end itemize
  594. @section aphaser
  595. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  596. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  597. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  598. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  599. @table @option
  600. @item in_gain
  601. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  602. @item out_gain
  603. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  604. @item delay
  605. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  606. @item decay
  607. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  608. @item speed
  609. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  610. @item type
  611. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  612. It accepts the following values:
  613. @table @samp
  614. @item triangular, t
  615. @item sinusoidal, s
  616. @end table
  617. @end table
  618. @anchor{aresample}
  619. @section aresample
  620. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  621. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  622. automatically convert between its input and output.
  623. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  624. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  625. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  626. The filter accepts the syntax
  627. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  628. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  629. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  630. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  631. @subsection Examples
  632. @itemize
  633. @item
  634. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  635. @example
  636. aresample=44100
  637. @end example
  638. @item
  639. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  640. samples per second compensation:
  641. @example
  642. aresample=async=1000
  643. @end example
  644. @end itemize
  645. @section asetnsamples
  646. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  647. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  648. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  649. signal its end.
  650. The filter accepts the following options:
  651. @table @option
  652. @item nb_out_samples, n
  653. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  654. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  655. Default value is 1024.
  656. @item pad, p
  657. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  658. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  659. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  660. @end table
  661. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  662. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  663. @example
  664. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  665. @end example
  666. @section asetrate
  667. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  668. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  669. The filter accepts the following options:
  670. @table @option
  671. @item sample_rate, r
  672. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  673. @end table
  674. @section ashowinfo
  675. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  676. The input audio is not modified.
  677. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  678. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  679. The following values are shown in the output:
  680. @table @option
  681. @item n
  682. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  683. @item pts
  684. The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  685. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  686. @item pts_time
  687. The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
  688. @item pos
  689. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  690. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  691. @item fmt
  692. The sample format.
  693. @item chlayout
  694. The channel layout.
  695. @item rate
  696. The sample rate for the audio frame.
  697. @item nb_samples
  698. The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
  699. @item checksum
  700. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
  701. audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  702. @item plane_checksums
  703. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  704. @end table
  705. @anchor{astats}
  706. @section astats
  707. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  708. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  709. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  710. It accepts the following option:
  711. @table @option
  712. @item length
  713. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  714. Default is @code{0.05} (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  715. @end table
  716. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  717. @table @option
  718. @item DC offset
  719. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  720. @item Min level
  721. Minimal sample level.
  722. @item Max level
  723. Maximal sample level.
  724. @item Peak level dB
  725. @item RMS level dB
  726. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  727. @item RMS peak dB
  728. @item RMS trough dB
  729. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  730. @item Crest factor
  731. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  732. @item Flat factor
  733. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  734. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  735. @item Peak count
  736. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  737. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  738. @end table
  739. @section astreamsync
  740. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  741. The filter accepts the following options:
  742. @table @option
  743. @item expr, e
  744. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  745. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  746. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  747. the following variables:
  748. @table @var
  749. @item b1 b2
  750. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  751. @item s1 s2
  752. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  753. @item t1 t2
  754. current timestamp of each stream
  755. @end table
  756. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  757. that has a smaller timestamp.
  758. @end table
  759. @subsection Examples
  760. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  761. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  762. @example
  763. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  764. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  765. [a2] [b2] amerge
  766. @end example
  767. @section asyncts
  768. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  769. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  770. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  771. It accepts the following parameters:
  772. @table @option
  773. @item compensate
  774. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  775. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  776. @item min_delta
  777. The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  778. adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
  779. sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  780. @item max_comp
  781. The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
  782. The default value is 500.
  783. @item first_pts
  784. Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
  785. rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
  786. no assumption is made about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or
  787. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  788. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  789. with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
  790. @end table
  791. @section atempo
  792. Adjust audio tempo.
  793. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  794. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  795. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  796. @subsection Examples
  797. @itemize
  798. @item
  799. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  800. @example
  801. atempo=0.8
  802. @end example
  803. @item
  804. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  805. @example
  806. atempo=1.25
  807. @end example
  808. @end itemize
  809. @section atrim
  810. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  811. It accepts the following parameters:
  812. @table @option
  813. @item start
  814. Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
  815. sample with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  816. @item end
  817. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  818. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  819. the last sample in the output.
  820. @item start_pts
  821. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  822. instead of seconds.
  823. @item end_pts
  824. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  825. of seconds.
  826. @item duration
  827. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  828. @item start_sample
  829. The number of the first sample that should be output.
  830. @item end_sample
  831. The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  832. @end table
  833. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  834. duration specifications; see
  835. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  836. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  837. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  838. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  839. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  840. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  841. to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  842. atrim filter.
  843. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  844. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  845. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  846. filters.
  847. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  848. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  849. Examples:
  850. @itemize
  851. @item
  852. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  853. @example
  854. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  855. @end example
  856. @item
  857. Keep only the first 1000 samples:
  858. @example
  859. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  860. @end example
  861. @end itemize
  862. @section bandpass
  863. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  864. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  865. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  866. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  867. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  868. The filter accepts the following options:
  869. @table @option
  870. @item frequency, f
  871. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  872. @item csg
  873. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  874. @item width_type
  875. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  876. @table @option
  877. @item h
  878. Hz
  879. @item q
  880. Q-Factor
  881. @item o
  882. octave
  883. @item s
  884. slope
  885. @end table
  886. @item width, w
  887. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  888. @end table
  889. @section bandreject
  890. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  891. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  892. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  893. The filter accepts the following options:
  894. @table @option
  895. @item frequency, f
  896. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  897. @item width_type
  898. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  899. @table @option
  900. @item h
  901. Hz
  902. @item q
  903. Q-Factor
  904. @item o
  905. octave
  906. @item s
  907. slope
  908. @end table
  909. @item width, w
  910. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  911. @end table
  912. @section bass
  913. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  914. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  915. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  916. The filter accepts the following options:
  917. @table @option
  918. @item gain, g
  919. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  920. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  921. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  922. @item frequency, f
  923. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  924. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  925. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  926. @item width_type
  927. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  928. @table @option
  929. @item h
  930. Hz
  931. @item q
  932. Q-Factor
  933. @item o
  934. octave
  935. @item s
  936. slope
  937. @end table
  938. @item width, w
  939. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  940. @end table
  941. @section biquad
  942. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  943. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  944. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  945. @section bs2b
  946. Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
  947. stereo audio records.
  948. It accepts the following parameters:
  949. @table @option
  950. @item profile
  951. Pre-defined crossfeed level.
  952. @table @option
  953. @item default
  954. Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
  955. @item cmoy
  956. Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
  957. @item jmeier
  958. Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
  959. @end table
  960. @item fcut
  961. Cut frequency (in Hz).
  962. @item feed
  963. Feed level (in Hz).
  964. @end table
  965. @section channelmap
  966. Remap input channels to new locations.
  967. It accepts the following parameters:
  968. @table @option
  969. @item channel_layout
  970. The channel layout of the output stream.
  971. @item map
  972. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  973. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  974. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  975. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  976. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  977. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  978. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  979. @end table
  980. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  981. output channels, preserving indices.
  982. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
  983. @example
  984. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  985. @end example
  986. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  987. the input.
  988. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  989. @example
  990. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  991. @end example
  992. @section channelsplit
  993. Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  994. It accepts the following parameters:
  995. @table @option
  996. @item channel_layout
  997. The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
  998. @end table
  999. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
  1000. @example
  1001. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  1002. @end example
  1003. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  1004. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  1005. Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
  1006. @example
  1007. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  1008. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  1009. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  1010. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  1011. side_right.wav
  1012. @end example
  1013. @section compand
  1014. Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.
  1015. It accepts the following parameters:
  1016. @table @option
  1017. @item attacks
  1018. @item decays
  1019. A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  1020. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  1021. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  1022. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  1023. shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  1024. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  1025. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  1026. @item points
  1027. A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  1028. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  1029. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  1030. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  1031. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  1032. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  1033. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  1034. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  1035. @item soft-knee
  1036. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
  1037. @item gain
  1038. Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
  1039. function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
  1040. It defaults to 0.
  1041. @item volume
  1042. Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
  1043. starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1044. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1045. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1046. quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
  1047. @item delay
  1048. Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1049. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1050. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1051. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
  1052. @end table
  1053. @subsection Examples
  1054. @itemize
  1055. @item
  1056. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
  1057. noisy environment:
  1058. @example
  1059. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1060. @end example
  1061. @item
  1062. A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1063. @example
  1064. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1065. @end example
  1066. @item
  1067. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1068. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1069. @example
  1070. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1071. @end example
  1072. @end itemize
  1073. @section dcshift
  1074. Apply a DC shift to the audio.
  1075. This can be useful to remove a DC offset (caused perhaps by a hardware problem
  1076. in the recording chain) from the audio. The effect of a DC offset is reduced
  1077. headroom and hence volume. The @ref{astats} filter can be used to determine if
  1078. a signal has a DC offset.
  1079. @table @option
  1080. @item shift
  1081. Set the DC shift, allowed range is [-1, 1]. It indicates the amount to shift
  1082. the audio.
  1083. @item limitergain
  1084. Optional. It should have a value much less than 1 (e.g. 0.05 or 0.02) and is
  1085. used to prevent clipping.
  1086. @end table
  1087. @section earwax
  1088. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1089. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1090. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1091. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1092. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1093. Ported from SoX.
  1094. @section equalizer
  1095. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1096. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1097. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1098. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1099. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1100. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1101. The filter accepts the following options:
  1102. @table @option
  1103. @item frequency, f
  1104. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1105. @item width_type
  1106. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1107. @table @option
  1108. @item h
  1109. Hz
  1110. @item q
  1111. Q-Factor
  1112. @item o
  1113. octave
  1114. @item s
  1115. slope
  1116. @end table
  1117. @item width, w
  1118. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1119. @item gain, g
  1120. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1121. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1122. @end table
  1123. @subsection Examples
  1124. @itemize
  1125. @item
  1126. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1127. @example
  1128. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1129. @end example
  1130. @item
  1131. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1132. @example
  1133. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1134. @end example
  1135. @end itemize
  1136. @section flanger
  1137. Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
  1138. The filter accepts the following options:
  1139. @table @option
  1140. @item delay
  1141. Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
  1142. @item depth
  1143. Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
  1144. @item regen
  1145. Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
  1146. Default value is 0.
  1147. @item width
  1148. Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
  1149. Default value is 71.
  1150. @item speed
  1151. Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
  1152. @item shape
  1153. Set swept wave shape, can be @var{triangular} or @var{sinusoidal}.
  1154. Default value is @var{sinusoidal}.
  1155. @item phase
  1156. Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
  1157. Default value is 25.
  1158. @item interp
  1159. Set delay-line interpolation, @var{linear} or @var{quadratic}.
  1160. Default is @var{linear}.
  1161. @end table
  1162. @section highpass
  1163. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1164. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1165. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1166. The filter accepts the following options:
  1167. @table @option
  1168. @item frequency, f
  1169. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1170. @item poles, p
  1171. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1172. @item width_type
  1173. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1174. @table @option
  1175. @item h
  1176. Hz
  1177. @item q
  1178. Q-Factor
  1179. @item o
  1180. octave
  1181. @item s
  1182. slope
  1183. @end table
  1184. @item width, w
  1185. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1186. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1187. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1188. @end table
  1189. @section join
  1190. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1191. It accepts the following parameters:
  1192. @table @option
  1193. @item inputs
  1194. The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
  1195. @item channel_layout
  1196. The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
  1197. @item map
  1198. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1199. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1200. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1201. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1202. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1203. channel.
  1204. @end table
  1205. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
  1206. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1207. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1208. Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
  1209. @example
  1210. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1211. @end example
  1212. Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1213. @example
  1214. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1215. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1216. out
  1217. @end example
  1218. @section ladspa
  1219. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1220. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1221. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1222. @table @option
  1223. @item file, f
  1224. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1225. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1226. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1227. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1228. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1229. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1230. @item plugin, p
  1231. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1232. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1233. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1234. @item controls, c
  1235. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1236. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1237. threshold or gain).
  1238. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1239. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1240. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1241. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1242. their valid ranges are printed.
  1243. @item sample_rate, s
  1244. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1245. zero inputs.
  1246. @item nb_samples, n
  1247. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1248. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1249. @item duration, d
  1250. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1251. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1252. for the accepted syntax.
  1253. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1254. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1255. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1256. supposed to be generated forever.
  1257. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1258. @end table
  1259. @subsection Examples
  1260. @itemize
  1261. @item
  1262. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1263. @example
  1264. ladspa=file=amp
  1265. @end example
  1266. @item
  1267. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1268. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1269. @example
  1270. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1271. @end example
  1272. @item
  1273. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1274. plugin library:
  1275. @example
  1276. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1277. @end example
  1278. @item
  1279. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1280. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1281. @example
  1282. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1283. @end example
  1284. @item
  1285. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1286. @example
  1287. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1288. @end example
  1289. @item
  1290. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1291. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1292. @example
  1293. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1294. @end example
  1295. @item
  1296. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1297. @example
  1298. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1299. @end example
  1300. @end itemize
  1301. @subsection Commands
  1302. This filter supports the following commands:
  1303. @table @option
  1304. @item cN
  1305. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1306. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1307. @end table
  1308. @section lowpass
  1309. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1310. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1311. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1312. The filter accepts the following options:
  1313. @table @option
  1314. @item frequency, f
  1315. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1316. @item poles, p
  1317. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1318. @item width_type
  1319. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1320. @table @option
  1321. @item h
  1322. Hz
  1323. @item q
  1324. Q-Factor
  1325. @item o
  1326. octave
  1327. @item s
  1328. slope
  1329. @end table
  1330. @item width, w
  1331. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1332. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1333. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1334. @end table
  1335. @section pan
  1336. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1337. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1338. This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
  1339. stream.
  1340. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1341. "@var{l}|@var{outdef}|@var{outdef}|..."
  1342. @table @option
  1343. @item l
  1344. output channel layout or number of channels
  1345. @item outdef
  1346. output channel specification, of the form:
  1347. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1348. @item out_name
  1349. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1350. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1351. @item gain
  1352. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1353. @item in_name
  1354. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1355. named and numbered input channels
  1356. @end table
  1357. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1358. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1359. avoiding clipping noise.
  1360. @subsection Mixing examples
  1361. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1362. factor for the left channel:
  1363. @example
  1364. pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1365. @end example
  1366. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1367. 7-channels surround:
  1368. @example
  1369. pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1370. @end example
  1371. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1372. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1373. needs.
  1374. @subsection Remapping examples
  1375. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1376. @itemize
  1377. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1378. @item only one input per channel output,
  1379. @end itemize
  1380. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1381. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1382. remapping.
  1383. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1384. dropping the extra channels:
  1385. @example
  1386. pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
  1387. @end example
  1388. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1389. and keep the input channel layout:
  1390. @example
  1391. pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
  1392. @end example
  1393. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1394. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1395. @example
  1396. pan="stereo|c1=c1"
  1397. @end example
  1398. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1399. front left and right:
  1400. @example
  1401. pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
  1402. @end example
  1403. @section replaygain
  1404. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1405. outputs it unchanged.
  1406. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1407. @section resample
  1408. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
  1409. not meant to be used directly.
  1410. @section silencedetect
  1411. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1412. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1413. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1414. minimum detected noise duration.
  1415. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1416. The filter accepts the following options:
  1417. @table @option
  1418. @item duration, d
  1419. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1420. @item noise, n
  1421. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1422. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1423. @end table
  1424. @subsection Examples
  1425. @itemize
  1426. @item
  1427. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1428. @example
  1429. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1430. @end example
  1431. @item
  1432. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1433. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1434. @example
  1435. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1436. @end example
  1437. @end itemize
  1438. @section silenceremove
  1439. Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
  1440. The filter accepts the following options:
  1441. @table @option
  1442. @item start_periods
  1443. This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
  1444. the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
  1445. beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
  1446. finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
  1447. the @var{start_periods} will be @code{1} but it can be increased to higher
  1448. values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
  1449. Default value is @code{0}.
  1450. @item start_duration
  1451. Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
  1452. trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
  1453. as silence and trimmed off. Default value is @code{0}.
  1454. @item start_threshold
  1455. This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
  1456. audio, a value of @code{0} may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
  1457. you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
  1458. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1459. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1460. @item stop_periods
  1461. Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
  1462. To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a @var{stop_periods}
  1463. that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
  1464. used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
  1465. @var{start_periods}, making it suitable for removing periods of silence
  1466. in the middle of the audio.
  1467. Default value is @code{0}.
  1468. @item stop_duration
  1469. Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
  1470. more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
  1471. the audio.
  1472. Default value is @code{0}.
  1473. @item stop_threshold
  1474. This is the same as @option{start_threshold} but for trimming silence from
  1475. the end of audio.
  1476. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1477. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1478. @item leave_silence
  1479. This indicate that @var{stop_duration} length of audio should be left intact
  1480. at the beginning of each period of silence.
  1481. For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
  1482. to remove the pauses completely. Default value is @code{0}.
  1483. @end table
  1484. @subsection Examples
  1485. @itemize
  1486. @item
  1487. The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
  1488. that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
  1489. pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
  1490. @example
  1491. silenceremove=1:5:0.02
  1492. @end example
  1493. @end itemize
  1494. @section treble
  1495. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1496. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1497. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1498. The filter accepts the following options:
  1499. @table @option
  1500. @item gain, g
  1501. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1502. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1503. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1504. @item frequency, f
  1505. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1506. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1507. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1508. @item width_type
  1509. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1510. @table @option
  1511. @item h
  1512. Hz
  1513. @item q
  1514. Q-Factor
  1515. @item o
  1516. octave
  1517. @item s
  1518. slope
  1519. @end table
  1520. @item width, w
  1521. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1522. @end table
  1523. @section volume
  1524. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1525. It accepts the following parameters:
  1526. @table @option
  1527. @item volume
  1528. Set audio volume expression.
  1529. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1530. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1531. @example
  1532. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1533. @end example
  1534. The default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1535. @item precision
  1536. This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
  1537. It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1538. precision of the volume scaling.
  1539. @table @option
  1540. @item fixed
  1541. 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1542. @item float
  1543. 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1544. @item double
  1545. 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
  1546. @end table
  1547. @item replaygain
  1548. Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
  1549. @table @option
  1550. @item drop
  1551. Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
  1552. @item ignore
  1553. Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
  1554. @item track
  1555. Prefer the track gain, if present.
  1556. @item album
  1557. Prefer the album gain, if present.
  1558. @end table
  1559. @item replaygain_preamp
  1560. Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
  1561. Default value for @var{replaygain_preamp} is 0.0.
  1562. @item eval
  1563. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1564. It accepts the following values:
  1565. @table @samp
  1566. @item once
  1567. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1568. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1569. @item frame
  1570. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1571. @end table
  1572. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1573. @end table
  1574. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1575. @table @option
  1576. @item n
  1577. frame number (starting at zero)
  1578. @item nb_channels
  1579. number of channels
  1580. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1581. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1582. @item nb_samples
  1583. number of samples in the current frame
  1584. @item pos
  1585. original frame position in the file
  1586. @item pts
  1587. frame PTS
  1588. @item sample_rate
  1589. sample rate
  1590. @item startpts
  1591. PTS at start of stream
  1592. @item startt
  1593. time at start of stream
  1594. @item t
  1595. frame time
  1596. @item tb
  1597. timestamp timebase
  1598. @item volume
  1599. last set volume value
  1600. @end table
  1601. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1602. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1603. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1604. @subsection Commands
  1605. This filter supports the following commands:
  1606. @table @option
  1607. @item volume
  1608. Modify the volume expression.
  1609. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1610. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1611. value.
  1612. @item replaygain_noclip
  1613. Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
  1614. Default value for @var{replaygain_noclip} is 1.
  1615. @end table
  1616. @subsection Examples
  1617. @itemize
  1618. @item
  1619. Halve the input audio volume:
  1620. @example
  1621. volume=volume=0.5
  1622. volume=volume=1/2
  1623. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1624. @end example
  1625. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1626. omitted, for example like in:
  1627. @example
  1628. volume=0.5
  1629. @end example
  1630. @item
  1631. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1632. @example
  1633. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1634. @end example
  1635. @item
  1636. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1637. @example
  1638. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1639. @end example
  1640. @end itemize
  1641. @section volumedetect
  1642. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1643. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1644. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1645. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1646. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1647. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1648. the samples).
  1649. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1650. @subsection Examples
  1651. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1652. @example
  1653. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1654. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1655. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1656. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1657. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1658. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1659. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1660. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1661. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1662. @end example
  1663. It means that:
  1664. @itemize
  1665. @item
  1666. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1667. @item
  1668. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1669. @item
  1670. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1671. @end itemize
  1672. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1673. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1674. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1675. @chapter Audio Sources
  1676. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1677. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1678. @section abuffer
  1679. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1680. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1681. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1682. It accepts the following parameters:
  1683. @table @option
  1684. @item time_base
  1685. The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1686. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1687. @item sample_rate
  1688. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1689. @item sample_fmt
  1690. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1691. Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
  1692. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1693. @item channel_layout
  1694. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1695. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1696. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1697. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1698. @item channels
  1699. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1700. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1701. must be consistent.
  1702. @end table
  1703. @subsection Examples
  1704. @example
  1705. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1706. @end example
  1707. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1708. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1709. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1710. equivalent to:
  1711. @example
  1712. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1713. @end example
  1714. @section aevalsrc
  1715. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1716. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1717. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1718. audio signal.
  1719. This source accepts the following options:
  1720. @table @option
  1721. @item exprs
  1722. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1723. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1724. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1725. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1726. @item channel_layout, c
  1727. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1728. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1729. @item duration, d
  1730. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1731. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1732. for the accepted syntax.
  1733. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1734. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1735. complete frame.
  1736. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1737. supposed to be generated forever.
  1738. @item nb_samples, n
  1739. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1740. default to 1024.
  1741. @item sample_rate, s
  1742. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1743. @end table
  1744. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1745. @table @option
  1746. @item n
  1747. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1748. @item t
  1749. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1750. @item s
  1751. sample rate
  1752. @end table
  1753. @subsection Examples
  1754. @itemize
  1755. @item
  1756. Generate silence:
  1757. @example
  1758. aevalsrc=0
  1759. @end example
  1760. @item
  1761. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1762. 8000 Hz:
  1763. @example
  1764. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1765. @end example
  1766. @item
  1767. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1768. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1769. @example
  1770. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1771. @end example
  1772. @item
  1773. Generate white noise:
  1774. @example
  1775. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1776. @end example
  1777. @item
  1778. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1779. @example
  1780. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1781. @end example
  1782. @item
  1783. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1784. @example
  1785. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1786. @end example
  1787. @end itemize
  1788. @section anullsrc
  1789. The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1790. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1791. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1792. synth filter).
  1793. This source accepts the following options:
  1794. @table @option
  1795. @item channel_layout, cl
  1796. Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1797. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1798. is "stereo".
  1799. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1800. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1801. channel layout values.
  1802. @item sample_rate, r
  1803. Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1804. @item nb_samples, n
  1805. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1806. @end table
  1807. @subsection Examples
  1808. @itemize
  1809. @item
  1810. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1811. @example
  1812. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1813. @end example
  1814. @item
  1815. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1816. @example
  1817. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1818. @end example
  1819. @end itemize
  1820. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1821. @section flite
  1822. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1823. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1824. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1825. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1826. The filter accepts the following options:
  1827. @table @option
  1828. @item list_voices
  1829. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1830. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1831. @item nb_samples, n
  1832. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1833. @item textfile
  1834. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1835. @item text
  1836. Set the text to speak.
  1837. @item voice, v
  1838. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1839. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1840. @end table
  1841. @subsection Examples
  1842. @itemize
  1843. @item
  1844. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthesize the text using the
  1845. standard flite voice:
  1846. @example
  1847. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1848. @end example
  1849. @item
  1850. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1851. @example
  1852. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1853. @end example
  1854. @item
  1855. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1856. @example
  1857. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1858. @end example
  1859. @item
  1860. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1861. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1862. @example
  1863. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1864. @end example
  1865. @end itemize
  1866. For more information about libflite, check:
  1867. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1868. @section sine
  1869. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1870. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1871. The filter accepts the following options:
  1872. @table @option
  1873. @item frequency, f
  1874. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1875. @item beep_factor, b
  1876. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1877. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1878. @item sample_rate, r
  1879. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1880. @item duration, d
  1881. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1882. @item samples_per_frame
  1883. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1884. @end table
  1885. @subsection Examples
  1886. @itemize
  1887. @item
  1888. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1889. @example
  1890. sine
  1891. @end example
  1892. @item
  1893. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1894. @example
  1895. sine=220:4:d=5
  1896. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1897. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1898. @end example
  1899. @end itemize
  1900. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1901. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1902. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1903. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1904. @section abuffersink
  1905. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1906. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1907. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1908. or the options system.
  1909. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1910. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1911. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1912. @section anullsink
  1913. Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1914. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  1915. tools.
  1916. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1917. @chapter Video Filters
  1918. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1919. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1920. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1921. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1922. build.
  1923. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1924. @section alphaextract
  1925. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1926. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1927. @section alphamerge
  1928. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1929. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1930. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1931. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1932. channel.
  1933. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1934. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1935. @example
  1936. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1937. @end example
  1938. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1939. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1940. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1941. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1942. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1943. @section ass
  1944. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1945. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1946. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1947. This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
  1948. the @ref{subtitles} filter:
  1949. @table @option
  1950. @item shaping
  1951. Set the shaping engine
  1952. Available values are:
  1953. @table @samp
  1954. @item auto
  1955. The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
  1956. @item simple
  1957. Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
  1958. @item complex
  1959. Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
  1960. @end table
  1961. The default is @code{auto}.
  1962. @end table
  1963. @section bbox
  1964. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1965. luminance plane.
  1966. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1967. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1968. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1969. log.
  1970. The filter accepts the following option:
  1971. @table @option
  1972. @item min_val
  1973. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1974. @end table
  1975. @section blackdetect
  1976. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1977. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1978. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1979. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1980. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1981. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1982. The filter accepts the following options:
  1983. @table @option
  1984. @item black_min_duration, d
  1985. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1986. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1987. Default value is 2.0.
  1988. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1989. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1990. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1991. @example
  1992. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1993. @end example
  1994. for which a picture is considered black.
  1995. Default value is 0.98.
  1996. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1997. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1998. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1999. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  2000. the following equation:
  2001. @example
  2002. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  2003. @end example
  2004. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  2005. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  2006. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  2007. Default value is 0.10.
  2008. @end table
  2009. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  2010. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  2011. @example
  2012. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  2013. @end example
  2014. @section blackframe
  2015. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  2016. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  2017. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  2018. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  2019. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  2020. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  2021. It accepts the following parameters:
  2022. @table @option
  2023. @item amount
  2024. The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
  2025. @code{98}.
  2026. @item threshold, thresh
  2027. The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
  2028. @code{32}.
  2029. @end table
  2030. @section blend, tblend
  2031. Blend two video frames into each other.
  2032. The @code{blend} filter takes two input streams and outputs one
  2033. stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
  2034. "bottom" layer. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  2035. The @code{tblend} (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
  2036. from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
  2037. the new frame on top of the old frame.
  2038. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2039. @table @option
  2040. @item c0_mode
  2041. @item c1_mode
  2042. @item c2_mode
  2043. @item c3_mode
  2044. @item all_mode
  2045. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2046. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  2047. Available values for component modes are:
  2048. @table @samp
  2049. @item addition
  2050. @item and
  2051. @item average
  2052. @item burn
  2053. @item darken
  2054. @item difference
  2055. @item difference128
  2056. @item divide
  2057. @item dodge
  2058. @item exclusion
  2059. @item hardlight
  2060. @item lighten
  2061. @item multiply
  2062. @item negation
  2063. @item normal
  2064. @item or
  2065. @item overlay
  2066. @item phoenix
  2067. @item pinlight
  2068. @item reflect
  2069. @item screen
  2070. @item softlight
  2071. @item subtract
  2072. @item vividlight
  2073. @item xor
  2074. @end table
  2075. @item c0_opacity
  2076. @item c1_opacity
  2077. @item c2_opacity
  2078. @item c3_opacity
  2079. @item all_opacity
  2080. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2081. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  2082. @item c0_expr
  2083. @item c1_expr
  2084. @item c2_expr
  2085. @item c3_expr
  2086. @item all_expr
  2087. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2088. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  2089. The expressions can use the following variables:
  2090. @table @option
  2091. @item N
  2092. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  2093. @item X
  2094. @item Y
  2095. the coordinates of the current sample
  2096. @item W
  2097. @item H
  2098. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  2099. @item SW
  2100. @item SH
  2101. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  2102. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  2103. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  2104. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  2105. @item T
  2106. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  2107. @item TOP, A
  2108. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  2109. @item BOTTOM, B
  2110. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  2111. @end table
  2112. @item shortest
  2113. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is
  2114. @code{0}. This option is only defined for the @code{blend} filter.
  2115. @item repeatlast
  2116. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  2117. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  2118. Default is @code{1}. This option is only defined for the @code{blend} filter.
  2119. @end table
  2120. @subsection Examples
  2121. @itemize
  2122. @item
  2123. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  2124. @example
  2125. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  2126. @end example
  2127. @item
  2128. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  2129. @example
  2130. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  2131. @end example
  2132. @item
  2133. Apply uncover left effect:
  2134. @example
  2135. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  2136. @end example
  2137. @item
  2138. Apply uncover down effect:
  2139. @example
  2140. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  2141. @end example
  2142. @item
  2143. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  2144. @example
  2145. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  2146. @end example
  2147. @item
  2148. Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
  2149. @example
  2150. tblend=all_mode=difference128
  2151. @end example
  2152. @end itemize
  2153. @section boxblur
  2154. Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  2155. It accepts the following parameters:
  2156. @table @option
  2157. @item luma_radius, lr
  2158. @item luma_power, lp
  2159. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2160. @item chroma_power, cp
  2161. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2162. @item alpha_power, ap
  2163. @end table
  2164. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2165. @table @option
  2166. @item luma_radius, lr
  2167. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2168. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2169. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  2170. corresponding input plane.
  2171. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  2172. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  2173. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  2174. planes.
  2175. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  2176. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  2177. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  2178. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  2179. @table @option
  2180. @item w
  2181. @item h
  2182. The input width and height in pixels.
  2183. @item cw
  2184. @item ch
  2185. The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
  2186. @item hsub
  2187. @item vsub
  2188. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  2189. pixel format "yuv422p", @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2190. @end table
  2191. @item luma_power, lp
  2192. @item chroma_power, cp
  2193. @item alpha_power, ap
  2194. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2195. corresponding plane.
  2196. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2197. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2198. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2199. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2200. @end table
  2201. @subsection Examples
  2202. @itemize
  2203. @item
  2204. Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
  2205. set to 2:
  2206. @example
  2207. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2208. boxblur=2:1
  2209. @end example
  2210. @item
  2211. Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2212. @example
  2213. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2214. @end example
  2215. @item
  2216. Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2217. @example
  2218. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2219. @end example
  2220. @end itemize
  2221. @section codecview
  2222. Visualize information exported by some codecs.
  2223. Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
  2224. means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
  2225. @var{export_mvs} flag in the codec @option{flags2} option.
  2226. The filter accepts the following option:
  2227. @table @option
  2228. @item mv
  2229. Set motion vectors to visualize.
  2230. Available flags for @var{mv} are:
  2231. @table @samp
  2232. @item pf
  2233. forward predicted MVs of P-frames
  2234. @item bf
  2235. forward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2236. @item bb
  2237. backward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2238. @end table
  2239. @end table
  2240. @subsection Examples
  2241. @itemize
  2242. @item
  2243. Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using @command{ffplay}:
  2244. @example
  2245. ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
  2246. @end example
  2247. @end itemize
  2248. @section colorbalance
  2249. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2250. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2251. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2252. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2253. value towards the complementary color.
  2254. The filter accepts the following options:
  2255. @table @option
  2256. @item rs
  2257. @item gs
  2258. @item bs
  2259. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2260. @item rm
  2261. @item gm
  2262. @item bm
  2263. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2264. @item rh
  2265. @item gh
  2266. @item bh
  2267. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2268. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2269. @end table
  2270. @subsection Examples
  2271. @itemize
  2272. @item
  2273. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2274. @example
  2275. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2276. @end example
  2277. @end itemize
  2278. @section colorlevels
  2279. Adjust video input frames using levels.
  2280. The filter accepts the following options:
  2281. @table @option
  2282. @item rimin
  2283. @item gimin
  2284. @item bimin
  2285. @item aimin
  2286. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
  2287. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2288. @item rimax
  2289. @item gimax
  2290. @item bimax
  2291. @item aimax
  2292. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
  2293. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{1}.
  2294. Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
  2295. (dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
  2296. @item romin
  2297. @item gomin
  2298. @item bomin
  2299. @item aomin
  2300. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
  2301. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2302. @item romax
  2303. @item gomax
  2304. @item bomax
  2305. @item aomax
  2306. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
  2307. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{1}.
  2308. Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
  2309. @end table
  2310. @subsection Examples
  2311. @itemize
  2312. @item
  2313. Make video output darker:
  2314. @example
  2315. colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
  2316. @end example
  2317. @item
  2318. Increase contrast:
  2319. @example
  2320. colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
  2321. @end example
  2322. @item
  2323. Make video output lighter:
  2324. @example
  2325. colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
  2326. @end example
  2327. @item
  2328. Increase brightness:
  2329. @example
  2330. colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
  2331. @end example
  2332. @end itemize
  2333. @section colorchannelmixer
  2334. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2335. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2336. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2337. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2338. @example
  2339. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2340. @end example
  2341. The filter accepts the following options:
  2342. @table @option
  2343. @item rr
  2344. @item rg
  2345. @item rb
  2346. @item ra
  2347. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2348. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2349. @item gr
  2350. @item gg
  2351. @item gb
  2352. @item ga
  2353. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2354. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2355. @item br
  2356. @item bg
  2357. @item bb
  2358. @item ba
  2359. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2360. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2361. @item ar
  2362. @item ag
  2363. @item ab
  2364. @item aa
  2365. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2366. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2367. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2368. @end table
  2369. @subsection Examples
  2370. @itemize
  2371. @item
  2372. Convert source to grayscale:
  2373. @example
  2374. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2375. @end example
  2376. @item
  2377. Simulate sepia tones:
  2378. @example
  2379. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2380. @end example
  2381. @end itemize
  2382. @section colormatrix
  2383. Convert color matrix.
  2384. The filter accepts the following options:
  2385. @table @option
  2386. @item src
  2387. @item dst
  2388. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2389. specified.
  2390. The accepted values are:
  2391. @table @samp
  2392. @item bt709
  2393. BT.709
  2394. @item bt601
  2395. BT.601
  2396. @item smpte240m
  2397. SMPTE-240M
  2398. @item fcc
  2399. FCC
  2400. @end table
  2401. @end table
  2402. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2403. @example
  2404. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2405. @end example
  2406. @section copy
  2407. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
  2408. testing purposes.
  2409. @section crop
  2410. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2411. It accepts the following parameters:
  2412. @table @option
  2413. @item w, out_w
  2414. The width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2415. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2416. configuration.
  2417. @item h, out_h
  2418. The height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2419. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2420. configuration.
  2421. @item x
  2422. The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
  2423. video. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2424. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2425. @item y
  2426. The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2427. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2428. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2429. @item keep_aspect
  2430. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2431. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2432. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2433. @end table
  2434. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2435. expressions containing the following constants:
  2436. @table @option
  2437. @item x
  2438. @item y
  2439. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2440. each new frame.
  2441. @item in_w
  2442. @item in_h
  2443. The input width and height.
  2444. @item iw
  2445. @item ih
  2446. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  2447. @item out_w
  2448. @item out_h
  2449. The output (cropped) width and height.
  2450. @item ow
  2451. @item oh
  2452. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2453. @item a
  2454. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2455. @item sar
  2456. input sample aspect ratio
  2457. @item dar
  2458. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2459. @item hsub
  2460. @item vsub
  2461. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2462. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2463. @item n
  2464. The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  2465. @item pos
  2466. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2467. @item t
  2468. The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  2469. @end table
  2470. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2471. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2472. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2473. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2474. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2475. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2476. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2477. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2478. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2479. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2480. @subsection Examples
  2481. @itemize
  2482. @item
  2483. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2484. @example
  2485. crop=100:100:12:34
  2486. @end example
  2487. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2488. @example
  2489. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2490. @end example
  2491. @item
  2492. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2493. @example
  2494. crop=100:100
  2495. @end example
  2496. @item
  2497. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2498. @example
  2499. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2500. @end example
  2501. @item
  2502. Crop the input video central square:
  2503. @example
  2504. crop=out_w=in_h
  2505. crop=in_h
  2506. @end example
  2507. @item
  2508. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2509. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2510. corner of the input image.
  2511. @example
  2512. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2513. @end example
  2514. @item
  2515. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2516. the top and bottom borders
  2517. @example
  2518. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2519. @end example
  2520. @item
  2521. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2522. @example
  2523. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2524. @end example
  2525. @item
  2526. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2527. @example
  2528. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2529. @end example
  2530. @item
  2531. Apply trembling effect:
  2532. @example
  2533. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2534. @end example
  2535. @item
  2536. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2537. @example
  2538. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2539. @end example
  2540. @item
  2541. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2542. @example
  2543. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2544. @end example
  2545. @end itemize
  2546. @section cropdetect
  2547. Auto-detect the crop size.
  2548. It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
  2549. recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2550. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2551. It accepts the following parameters:
  2552. @table @option
  2553. @item limit
  2554. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2555. from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8bit based formats). An intensity
  2556. value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
  2557. You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
  2558. on the bitdepth of the pixel format.
  2559. @item round
  2560. The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
  2561. 16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
  2562. get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2563. encoding to most video codecs.
  2564. @item reset_count, reset
  2565. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2566. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2567. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2568. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2569. indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
  2570. playback.
  2571. @end table
  2572. @anchor{curves}
  2573. @section curves
  2574. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2575. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2576. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2577. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2578. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2579. the output frame.
  2580. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2581. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2582. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2583. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2584. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2585. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2586. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2587. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2588. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2589. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2590. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2591. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2592. The filter accepts the following options:
  2593. @table @option
  2594. @item preset
  2595. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2596. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2597. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2598. Available presets are:
  2599. @table @samp
  2600. @item none
  2601. @item color_negative
  2602. @item cross_process
  2603. @item darker
  2604. @item increase_contrast
  2605. @item lighter
  2606. @item linear_contrast
  2607. @item medium_contrast
  2608. @item negative
  2609. @item strong_contrast
  2610. @item vintage
  2611. @end table
  2612. Default is @code{none}.
  2613. @item master, m
  2614. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2615. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2616. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2617. post-processing LUT.
  2618. @item red, r
  2619. Set the key points for the red component.
  2620. @item green, g
  2621. Set the key points for the green component.
  2622. @item blue, b
  2623. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2624. @item all
  2625. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2626. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2627. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2628. @option{all} setting.
  2629. @item psfile
  2630. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2631. @end table
  2632. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2633. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2634. @subsection Examples
  2635. @itemize
  2636. @item
  2637. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2638. @example
  2639. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2640. @end example
  2641. @item
  2642. Vintage effect:
  2643. @example
  2644. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2645. @end example
  2646. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2647. @table @var
  2648. @item red
  2649. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2650. @item green
  2651. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2652. @item blue
  2653. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2654. @end table
  2655. @item
  2656. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2657. @example
  2658. curves=preset=vintage
  2659. @end example
  2660. @item
  2661. Or simply:
  2662. @example
  2663. curves=vintage
  2664. @end example
  2665. @item
  2666. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2667. @example
  2668. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2669. @end example
  2670. @end itemize
  2671. @section dctdnoiz
  2672. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2673. This filter is not designed for real time.
  2674. The filter accepts the following options:
  2675. @table @option
  2676. @item sigma, s
  2677. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2678. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2679. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2680. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2681. Default is @code{0}.
  2682. @item overlap
  2683. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
  2684. may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
  2685. risk of various artefacts.
  2686. If the overlapping value doesn't permit processing the whole input width or
  2687. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2688. Default value is @var{blocksize}-1, which is the best possible setting.
  2689. @item expr, e
  2690. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2691. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2692. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2693. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2694. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2695. variable.
  2696. @item n
  2697. Set the @var{blocksize} using the number of bits. @code{1<<@var{n}} defines the
  2698. @var{blocksize}, which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
  2699. The default value is @var{3} (8x8) and can be raised to @var{4} for a
  2700. @var{blocksize} of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
  2701. on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
  2702. better de-noising.
  2703. @end table
  2704. @subsection Examples
  2705. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2706. @example
  2707. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2708. @end example
  2709. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2710. @example
  2711. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2712. @end example
  2713. Violent denoise using a block size of @code{16x16}:
  2714. @example
  2715. dctdnoiz=15:n=4
  2716. @end example
  2717. @anchor{decimate}
  2718. @section decimate
  2719. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2720. The filter accepts the following options:
  2721. @table @option
  2722. @item cycle
  2723. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2724. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2725. Default is @code{5}.
  2726. @item dupthresh
  2727. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2728. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2729. is @code{1.1}
  2730. @item scthresh
  2731. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2732. @item blockx
  2733. @item blocky
  2734. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2735. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2736. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2737. @item ppsrc
  2738. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2739. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2740. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2741. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2742. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2743. @code{0}.
  2744. @item chroma
  2745. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2746. @code{1}.
  2747. @end table
  2748. @section dejudder
  2749. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2750. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2751. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2752. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2753. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2754. rate video.
  2755. The option available in this filter is:
  2756. @table @option
  2757. @item cycle
  2758. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2759. Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2760. @table @samp
  2761. @item 4
  2762. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2763. @item 5
  2764. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2765. @item 20
  2766. If a mixture of the two.
  2767. @end table
  2768. The default is @samp{4}.
  2769. @end table
  2770. @section delogo
  2771. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2772. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2773. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2774. It accepts the following parameters:
  2775. @table @option
  2776. @item x
  2777. @item y
  2778. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2779. specified.
  2780. @item w
  2781. @item h
  2782. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2783. specified.
  2784. @item band, t
  2785. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2786. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2787. @item show
  2788. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2789. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2790. The default value is 0.
  2791. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2792. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2793. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2794. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2795. @end table
  2796. @subsection Examples
  2797. @itemize
  2798. @item
  2799. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2800. and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
  2801. @example
  2802. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2803. @end example
  2804. @end itemize
  2805. @section deshake
  2806. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2807. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2808. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2809. The filter accepts the following options:
  2810. @table @option
  2811. @item x
  2812. @item y
  2813. @item w
  2814. @item h
  2815. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2816. vectors.
  2817. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2818. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2819. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2820. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2821. box.
  2822. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2823. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2824. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2825. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2826. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2827. Default - search the whole frame.
  2828. @item rx
  2829. @item ry
  2830. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2831. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2832. @item edge
  2833. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2834. frame. Available values are:
  2835. @table @samp
  2836. @item blank, 0
  2837. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2838. @item original, 1
  2839. Original image at blank locations
  2840. @item clamp, 2
  2841. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2842. @item mirror, 3
  2843. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2844. @end table
  2845. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2846. @item blocksize
  2847. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2848. default 8.
  2849. @item contrast
  2850. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2851. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2852. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2853. @item search
  2854. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2855. @table @samp
  2856. @item exhaustive, 0
  2857. Set exhaustive search
  2858. @item less, 1
  2859. Set less exhaustive search.
  2860. @end table
  2861. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2862. @item filename
  2863. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2864. specified file.
  2865. @item opencl
  2866. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2867. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2868. @end table
  2869. @section detelecine
  2870. Apply an exact inverse of the telecine operation. It requires a predefined
  2871. pattern specified using the pattern option which must be the same as that passed
  2872. to the telecine filter.
  2873. This filter accepts the following options:
  2874. @table @option
  2875. @item first_field
  2876. @table @samp
  2877. @item top, t
  2878. top field first
  2879. @item bottom, b
  2880. bottom field first
  2881. The default value is @code{top}.
  2882. @end table
  2883. @item pattern
  2884. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  2885. The default value is @code{23}.
  2886. @item start_frame
  2887. A number representing position of the first frame with respect to the telecine
  2888. pattern. This is to be used if the stream is cut. The default value is @code{0}.
  2889. @end table
  2890. @section drawbox
  2891. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2892. It accepts the following parameters:
  2893. @table @option
  2894. @item x
  2895. @item y
  2896. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
  2897. @item width, w
  2898. @item height, h
  2899. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
  2900. the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
  2901. @item color, c
  2902. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2903. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2904. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2905. video with inverted luma.
  2906. @item thickness, t
  2907. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2908. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2909. @end table
  2910. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2911. following constants:
  2912. @table @option
  2913. @item dar
  2914. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2915. @item hsub
  2916. @item vsub
  2917. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2918. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2919. @item in_h, ih
  2920. @item in_w, iw
  2921. The input width and height.
  2922. @item sar
  2923. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2924. @item x
  2925. @item y
  2926. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2927. @item w
  2928. @item h
  2929. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2930. @item t
  2931. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2932. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2933. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2934. @end table
  2935. @subsection Examples
  2936. @itemize
  2937. @item
  2938. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2939. @example
  2940. drawbox
  2941. @end example
  2942. @item
  2943. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2944. @example
  2945. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2946. @end example
  2947. The previous example can be specified as:
  2948. @example
  2949. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2950. @end example
  2951. @item
  2952. Fill the box with pink color:
  2953. @example
  2954. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2955. @end example
  2956. @item
  2957. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2958. @example
  2959. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2960. @end example
  2961. @end itemize
  2962. @section drawgrid
  2963. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2964. It accepts the following parameters:
  2965. @table @option
  2966. @item x
  2967. @item y
  2968. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2969. @item width, w
  2970. @item height, h
  2971. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2972. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2973. framed. Default to 0.
  2974. @item color, c
  2975. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2976. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2977. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2978. video with inverted luma.
  2979. @item thickness, t
  2980. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2981. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2982. @end table
  2983. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2984. following constants:
  2985. @table @option
  2986. @item dar
  2987. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2988. @item hsub
  2989. @item vsub
  2990. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2991. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2992. @item in_h, ih
  2993. @item in_w, iw
  2994. The input grid cell width and height.
  2995. @item sar
  2996. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2997. @item x
  2998. @item y
  2999. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  3000. @item w
  3001. @item h
  3002. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  3003. @item t
  3004. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  3005. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  3006. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  3007. @end table
  3008. @subsection Examples
  3009. @itemize
  3010. @item
  3011. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  3012. @example
  3013. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  3014. @end example
  3015. @item
  3016. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  3017. @example
  3018. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  3019. @end example
  3020. @end itemize
  3021. @anchor{drawtext}
  3022. @section drawtext
  3023. Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
  3024. libfreetype library.
  3025. To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  3026. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  3027. To enable default font fallback and the @var{font} option you need to
  3028. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libfontconfig}.
  3029. To enable the @var{text_shaping} option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  3030. @code{--enable-libfribidi}.
  3031. @subsection Syntax
  3032. It accepts the following parameters:
  3033. @table @option
  3034. @item box
  3035. Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
  3036. The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  3037. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  3038. @item boxcolor
  3039. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  3040. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3041. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  3042. @item borderw
  3043. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  3044. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  3045. @item bordercolor
  3046. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  3047. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3048. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  3049. @item expansion
  3050. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  3051. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  3052. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  3053. below for details.
  3054. @item fix_bounds
  3055. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  3056. @item fontcolor
  3057. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  3058. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3059. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  3060. @item fontcolor_expr
  3061. String which is expanded the same way as @var{text} to obtain dynamic
  3062. @var{fontcolor} value. By default this option has empty value and is not
  3063. processed. When this option is set, it overrides @var{fontcolor} option.
  3064. @item font
  3065. The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
  3066. @item fontfile
  3067. The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
  3068. This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
  3069. @item fontsize
  3070. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  3071. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  3072. @item text_shaping
  3073. If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
  3074. right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
  3075. Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
  3076. By default 1 (if supported).
  3077. @item ft_load_flags
  3078. The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  3079. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  3080. a combination of the following values:
  3081. @table @var
  3082. @item default
  3083. @item no_scale
  3084. @item no_hinting
  3085. @item render
  3086. @item no_bitmap
  3087. @item vertical_layout
  3088. @item force_autohint
  3089. @item crop_bitmap
  3090. @item pedantic
  3091. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  3092. @item no_recurse
  3093. @item ignore_transform
  3094. @item monochrome
  3095. @item linear_design
  3096. @item no_autohint
  3097. @end table
  3098. Default value is "default".
  3099. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  3100. libfreetype flags.
  3101. @item shadowcolor
  3102. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  3103. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3104. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  3105. @item shadowx
  3106. @item shadowy
  3107. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  3108. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  3109. values. The default value for both is "0".
  3110. @item start_number
  3111. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  3112. is "0".
  3113. @item tabsize
  3114. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  3115. Default value is 4.
  3116. @item timecode
  3117. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  3118. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  3119. option must be specified.
  3120. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  3121. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  3122. @item text
  3123. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  3124. encoded characters.
  3125. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  3126. @var{textfile}.
  3127. @item textfile
  3128. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  3129. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  3130. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  3131. parameter @var{text}.
  3132. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  3133. @item reload
  3134. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  3135. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  3136. @item x
  3137. @item y
  3138. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  3139. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  3140. output image.
  3141. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  3142. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  3143. @end table
  3144. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  3145. following constants and functions:
  3146. @table @option
  3147. @item dar
  3148. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  3149. @item hsub
  3150. @item vsub
  3151. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  3152. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  3153. @item line_h, lh
  3154. the height of each text line
  3155. @item main_h, h, H
  3156. the input height
  3157. @item main_w, w, W
  3158. the input width
  3159. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  3160. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  3161. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  3162. glyphs.
  3163. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  3164. upwards.
  3165. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  3166. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  3167. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  3168. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  3169. upwards.
  3170. @item max_glyph_h
  3171. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  3172. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  3173. @var{descent}.
  3174. @item max_glyph_w
  3175. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  3176. contained in the rendered text
  3177. @item n
  3178. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  3179. @item rand(min, max)
  3180. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  3181. @item sar
  3182. The input sample aspect ratio.
  3183. @item t
  3184. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3185. @item text_h, th
  3186. the height of the rendered text
  3187. @item text_w, tw
  3188. the width of the rendered text
  3189. @item x
  3190. @item y
  3191. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  3192. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  3193. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  3194. @end table
  3195. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  3196. @subsection Text expansion
  3197. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  3198. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  3199. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  3200. feature is deprecated.
  3201. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  3202. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  3203. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  3204. The backslash character @samp{\}, followed by any character, always expands to
  3205. the second character.
  3206. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  3207. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  3208. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  3209. they should be escaped.
  3210. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  3211. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  3212. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  3213. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  3214. problems.
  3215. The following functions are available:
  3216. @table @command
  3217. @item expr, e
  3218. The expression evaluation result.
  3219. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  3220. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  3221. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  3222. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  3223. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  3224. value.
  3225. @item expr_int_format, eif
  3226. Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.
  3227. The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the @var{expr} function.
  3228. The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are @samp{x},
  3229. @samp{X}, @samp{d} and @samp{u}. They are treated exactly as in the
  3230. @code{printf} function.
  3231. The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
  3232. It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
  3233. @item gmtime
  3234. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  3235. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3236. @item localtime
  3237. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  3238. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3239. @item metadata
  3240. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  3241. @item n, frame_num
  3242. The frame number, starting from 0.
  3243. @item pict_type
  3244. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  3245. @item pts
  3246. The timestamp of the current frame.
  3247. It can take up to two arguments.
  3248. The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to @code{flt}
  3249. for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; @code{hms} stands
  3250. for a formatted @var{[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm} timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
  3251. The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
  3252. @end table
  3253. @subsection Examples
  3254. @itemize
  3255. @item
  3256. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  3257. optional parameters.
  3258. @example
  3259. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  3260. @end example
  3261. @item
  3262. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  3263. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  3264. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  3265. opacity of 20%.
  3266. @example
  3267. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  3268. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  3269. @end example
  3270. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  3271. within the parameter list.
  3272. @item
  3273. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  3274. @example
  3275. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  3276. @end example
  3277. @item
  3278. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  3279. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  3280. with no newlines.
  3281. @example
  3282. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  3283. @end example
  3284. @item
  3285. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  3286. @example
  3287. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  3288. @end example
  3289. @item
  3290. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  3291. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  3292. @example
  3293. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  3294. @end example
  3295. @item
  3296. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  3297. @example
  3298. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  3299. @end example
  3300. @item
  3301. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  3302. @example
  3303. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  3304. @end example
  3305. @item
  3306. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  3307. @example
  3308. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime\:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  3309. @end example
  3310. @item
  3311. Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):
  3312. @example
  3313. #!/bin/sh
  3314. DS=1.0 # display start
  3315. DE=10.0 # display end
  3316. FID=1.5 # fade in duration
  3317. FOD=5 # fade out duration
  3318. ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%@{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 @}"
  3319. @end example
  3320. @end itemize
  3321. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  3322. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  3323. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  3324. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  3325. For more information about libfribidi, check:
  3326. @url{http://fribidi.org/}.
  3327. @section edgedetect
  3328. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  3329. The filter accepts the following options:
  3330. @table @option
  3331. @item low
  3332. @item high
  3333. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  3334. algorithm.
  3335. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  3336. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3337. by the low threshold.
  3338. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be chosen in the range
  3339. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3340. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3341. is @code{50/255}.
  3342. @item mode
  3343. Define the drawing mode.
  3344. @table @samp
  3345. @item wires
  3346. Draw white/gray wires on black background.
  3347. @item colormix
  3348. Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
  3349. @end table
  3350. Default value is @var{wires}.
  3351. @end table
  3352. @subsection Examples
  3353. @itemize
  3354. @item
  3355. Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
  3356. @example
  3357. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3358. @end example
  3359. @item
  3360. Painting effect without thresholding:
  3361. @example
  3362. edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
  3363. @end example
  3364. @end itemize
  3365. @section eq
  3366. Set brightness, contrast, saturation and approximate gamma adjustment.
  3367. The filter accepts the following options:
  3368. @table @option
  3369. @item contrast
  3370. Set the contrast expression. The value must be a float value in range
  3371. @code{-2.0} to @code{2.0}. The default value is "0".
  3372. @item brightness
  3373. Set the brightness expression. The value must be a float value in
  3374. range @code{-1.0} to @code{1.0}. The default value is "0".
  3375. @item saturation
  3376. Set the saturation expression. The value must be a float in
  3377. range @code{0.0} to @code{3.0}. The default value is "1".
  3378. @item gamma
  3379. Set the gamma expression. The value must be a float in range
  3380. @code{0.1} to @code{10.0}. The default value is "1".
  3381. @item gamma_r
  3382. Set the gamma expression for red. The value must be a float in
  3383. range @code{0.1} to @code{10.0}. The default value is "1".
  3384. @item gamma_g
  3385. Set the gamma expression for green. The value must be a float in range
  3386. @code{0.1} to @code{10.0}. The default value is "1".
  3387. @item gamma_b
  3388. Set the gamma expression for blue. The value must be a float in range
  3389. @code{0.1} to @code{10.0}. The default value is "1".
  3390. @item gamma_weight
  3391. Set the gamma weight expression. It can be used to reduce the effect
  3392. of a high gamma value on bright image areas, e.g. keep them from
  3393. getting overamplified and just plain white. The value must be a float
  3394. in range @code{0.0} to @code{1.0}. A value of @code{0.0} turns the
  3395. gamma correction all the way down while @code{1.0} leaves it at its
  3396. full strength. Default is "1".
  3397. @item eval
  3398. Set when the expressions for brightness, contrast, saturation and
  3399. gamma expressions are evaluated.
  3400. It accepts the following values:
  3401. @table @samp
  3402. @item init
  3403. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  3404. when a command is processed
  3405. @item frame
  3406. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  3407. @end table
  3408. Default value is @samp{init}.
  3409. @end table
  3410. The expressions accept the following parameters:
  3411. @table @option
  3412. @item n
  3413. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  3414. @item pos
  3415. byte position of the corresponding packet in the input file, NAN if
  3416. unspecified
  3417. @item r
  3418. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  3419. @item t
  3420. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3421. @end table
  3422. @subsection Commands
  3423. The filter supports the following commands:
  3424. @table @option
  3425. @item contrast
  3426. Set the contrast expression.
  3427. @item brightness
  3428. Set the brightness expression.
  3429. @item saturation
  3430. Set the saturation expression.
  3431. @item gamma
  3432. Set the gamma expression.
  3433. @item gamma_r
  3434. Set the gamma_r expression.
  3435. @item gamma_g
  3436. Set gamma_g expression.
  3437. @item gamma_b
  3438. Set gamma_b expression.
  3439. @item gamma_weight
  3440. Set gamma_weight expression.
  3441. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  3442. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  3443. value.
  3444. @end table
  3445. @section extractplanes
  3446. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3447. separate grayscale video streams.
  3448. The filter accepts the following option:
  3449. @table @option
  3450. @item planes
  3451. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3452. Available values for planes are:
  3453. @table @samp
  3454. @item y
  3455. @item u
  3456. @item v
  3457. @item a
  3458. @item r
  3459. @item g
  3460. @item b
  3461. @end table
  3462. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3463. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3464. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3465. @end table
  3466. @subsection Examples
  3467. @itemize
  3468. @item
  3469. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3470. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3471. @example
  3472. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3473. @end example
  3474. @end itemize
  3475. @section elbg
  3476. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3477. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3478. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3479. of distinct output colors.
  3480. This filter accepts the following options.
  3481. @table @option
  3482. @item codebook_length, l
  3483. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3484. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3485. @item nb_steps, n
  3486. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3487. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3488. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3489. @item seed, s
  3490. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3491. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3492. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3493. @end table
  3494. @section fade
  3495. Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
  3496. It accepts the following parameters:
  3497. @table @option
  3498. @item type, t
  3499. The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3500. effect.
  3501. Default is @code{in}.
  3502. @item start_frame, s
  3503. Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
  3504. effect at. Default is 0.
  3505. @item nb_frames, n
  3506. The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
  3507. fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
  3508. At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
  3509. selected @option{color}.
  3510. Default is 25.
  3511. @item alpha
  3512. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3513. Default value is 0.
  3514. @item start_time, st
  3515. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3516. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3517. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3518. @item duration, d
  3519. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3520. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3521. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3522. selected @option{color}.
  3523. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0
  3524. (nb_frames is used by default).
  3525. @item color, c
  3526. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3527. @end table
  3528. @subsection Examples
  3529. @itemize
  3530. @item
  3531. Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
  3532. @example
  3533. fade=in:0:30
  3534. @end example
  3535. The command above is equivalent to:
  3536. @example
  3537. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3538. @end example
  3539. @item
  3540. Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3541. @example
  3542. fade=out:155:45
  3543. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3544. @end example
  3545. @item
  3546. Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3547. @example
  3548. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3549. @end example
  3550. @item
  3551. Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3552. @example
  3553. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3554. @end example
  3555. @item
  3556. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3557. @example
  3558. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3559. @end example
  3560. @item
  3561. Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3562. @example
  3563. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3564. @end example
  3565. @end itemize
  3566. @section fftfilt
  3567. Apply arbitrary expressions to samples in frequency domain
  3568. @table @option
  3569. @item dc_Y
  3570. Adjust the dc value (gain) of the luma plane of the image. The filter
  3571. accepts an integer value in range @code{0} to @code{1000}. The default
  3572. value is set to @code{0}.
  3573. @item dc_U
  3574. Adjust the dc value (gain) of the 1st chroma plane of the image. The
  3575. filter accepts an integer value in range @code{0} to @code{1000}. The
  3576. default value is set to @code{0}.
  3577. @item dc_V
  3578. Adjust the dc value (gain) of the 2nd chroma plane of the image. The
  3579. filter accepts an integer value in range @code{0} to @code{1000}. The
  3580. default value is set to @code{0}.
  3581. @item weight_Y
  3582. Set the frequency domain weight expression for the luma plane.
  3583. @item weight_U
  3584. Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 1st chroma plane.
  3585. @item weight_V
  3586. Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 2nd chroma plane.
  3587. The filter accepts the following variables:
  3588. @item X
  3589. @item Y
  3590. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3591. @item W
  3592. @item H
  3593. The width and height of the image.
  3594. @end table
  3595. @subsection Examples
  3596. @itemize
  3597. @item
  3598. High-pass:
  3599. @example
  3600. fftfilt=dc_Y=128:weight_Y='squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'
  3601. @end example
  3602. @item
  3603. Low-pass:
  3604. @example
  3605. fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='squish((Y+X)/100-1)'
  3606. @end example
  3607. @item
  3608. Sharpen:
  3609. @example
  3610. fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='1+squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'
  3611. @end example
  3612. @end itemize
  3613. @section field
  3614. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3615. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3616. non-interlaced.
  3617. The filter accepts the following options:
  3618. @table @option
  3619. @item type
  3620. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3621. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3622. @code{bottom}).
  3623. @end table
  3624. @section fieldmatch
  3625. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3626. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3627. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3628. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3629. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3630. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3631. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3632. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3633. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3634. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3635. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3636. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3637. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3638. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3639. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3640. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3641. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3642. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3643. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3644. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3645. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3646. The @ref{decimate} filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
  3647. Do not use @code{fieldmatch} and @ref{decimate} if your input has mixed
  3648. telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
  3649. The filter accepts the following options:
  3650. @table @option
  3651. @item order
  3652. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3653. @table @samp
  3654. @item auto
  3655. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3656. @item bff
  3657. Assume bottom field first.
  3658. @item tff
  3659. Assume top field first.
  3660. @end table
  3661. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3662. stream.
  3663. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3664. @item mode
  3665. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3666. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3667. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3668. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3669. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3670. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3671. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3672. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3673. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3674. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3675. Available values are:
  3676. @table @samp
  3677. @item pc
  3678. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3679. @item pc_n
  3680. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3681. @item pc_u
  3682. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3683. @item pc_n_ub
  3684. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3685. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3686. @item pcn
  3687. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3688. @item pcn_ub
  3689. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3690. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3691. @end table
  3692. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3693. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3694. @var{top}).
  3695. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3696. the slowest.
  3697. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3698. @item ppsrc
  3699. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3700. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3701. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3702. VFM/TFM.
  3703. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3704. @item field
  3705. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3706. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3707. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3708. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3709. @table @samp
  3710. @item auto
  3711. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3712. @item bottom
  3713. Match from the bottom field.
  3714. @item top
  3715. Match from the top field.
  3716. @end table
  3717. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3718. @item mchroma
  3719. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3720. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3721. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3722. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3723. the cost of some accuracy.
  3724. Default value is @code{1}.
  3725. @item y0
  3726. @item y1
  3727. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3728. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3729. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3730. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3731. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3732. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3733. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3734. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3735. @item scthresh
  3736. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3737. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3738. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3739. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3740. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3741. @item combmatch
  3742. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3743. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3744. final match. Available values are:
  3745. @table @samp
  3746. @item none
  3747. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3748. @item sc
  3749. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3750. @item full
  3751. Use combed scores all the time.
  3752. @end table
  3753. Default is @var{sc}.
  3754. @item combdbg
  3755. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3756. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3757. Available values are:
  3758. @table @samp
  3759. @item none
  3760. No forced calculation.
  3761. @item pcn
  3762. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3763. @item pcnub
  3764. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3765. @end table
  3766. Default value is @var{none}.
  3767. @item cthresh
  3768. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3769. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3770. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3771. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3772. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3773. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3774. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3775. Default value is @code{9}.
  3776. @item chroma
  3777. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3778. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3779. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3780. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3781. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3782. Default value is @code{0}.
  3783. @item blockx
  3784. @item blocky
  3785. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3786. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3787. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3788. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3789. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3790. to 512.
  3791. Default value is @code{16}.
  3792. @item combpel
  3793. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3794. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3795. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3796. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3797. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3798. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3799. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3800. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3801. Default value is @code{80}.
  3802. @end table
  3803. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3804. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3805. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3806. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3807. @example
  3808. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3809. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3810. @end example
  3811. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3812. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3813. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3814. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3815. @example
  3816. Input stream:
  3817. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3818. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3819. Matches: c c n n c
  3820. Output stream:
  3821. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3822. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3823. @end example
  3824. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3825. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3826. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3827. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3828. looks like this:
  3829. @example
  3830. Input stream:
  3831. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3832. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3833. Matches: c c p p c
  3834. Output stream:
  3835. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3836. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3837. @end example
  3838. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3839. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3840. @itemize
  3841. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3842. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3843. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3844. @end itemize
  3845. @subsubsection u/b
  3846. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3847. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3848. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3849. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3850. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3851. @example
  3852. Match: c p n b u
  3853. x x x x x
  3854. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3855. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3856. x x x x x
  3857. Output frames:
  3858. 2 1 2 2 2
  3859. 2 2 2 1 3
  3860. @end example
  3861. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3862. @example
  3863. Match: c p n b u
  3864. x x x x x
  3865. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3866. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3867. x x x x x
  3868. Output frames:
  3869. 2 2 2 1 2
  3870. 2 1 3 2 2
  3871. @end example
  3872. @subsection Examples
  3873. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3874. @example
  3875. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3876. @end example
  3877. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3878. @example
  3879. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3880. @end example
  3881. @section fieldorder
  3882. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3883. It accepts the following parameters:
  3884. @table @option
  3885. @item order
  3886. The output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3887. for bottom field first.
  3888. @end table
  3889. The default value is @samp{tff}.
  3890. The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
  3891. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3892. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3893. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3894. flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
  3895. not alter the incoming video.
  3896. It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3897. which is bottom field first.
  3898. For example:
  3899. @example
  3900. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3901. @end example
  3902. @section fifo
  3903. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3904. It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3905. framework.
  3906. It does not take parameters.
  3907. @anchor{format}
  3908. @section format
  3909. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3910. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
  3911. the next filter.
  3912. It accepts the following parameters:
  3913. @table @option
  3914. @item pix_fmts
  3915. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  3916. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3917. @end table
  3918. @subsection Examples
  3919. @itemize
  3920. @item
  3921. Convert the input video to the @var{yuv420p} format
  3922. @example
  3923. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3924. @end example
  3925. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3926. @example
  3927. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3928. @end example
  3929. @end itemize
  3930. @anchor{fps}
  3931. @section fps
  3932. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3933. frames as necessary.
  3934. It accepts the following parameters:
  3935. @table @option
  3936. @item fps
  3937. The desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3938. @item round
  3939. Rounding method.
  3940. Possible values are:
  3941. @table @option
  3942. @item zero
  3943. zero round towards 0
  3944. @item inf
  3945. round away from 0
  3946. @item down
  3947. round towards -infinity
  3948. @item up
  3949. round towards +infinity
  3950. @item near
  3951. round to nearest
  3952. @end table
  3953. The default is @code{near}.
  3954. @item start_time
  3955. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3956. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3957. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3958. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3959. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3960. frames with a negative PTS.
  3961. @end table
  3962. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3963. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3964. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3965. @subsection Examples
  3966. @itemize
  3967. @item
  3968. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3969. @example
  3970. fps=fps=25
  3971. @end example
  3972. @item
  3973. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3974. @example
  3975. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3976. @end example
  3977. @end itemize
  3978. @section framepack
  3979. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3980. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3981. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3982. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3983. @ref{fps} filters.
  3984. It accepts the following parameters:
  3985. @table @option
  3986. @item format
  3987. The desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3988. @table @option
  3989. @item sbs
  3990. The views are next to each other (default).
  3991. @item tab
  3992. The views are on top of each other.
  3993. @item lines
  3994. The views are packed by line.
  3995. @item columns
  3996. The views are packed by column.
  3997. @item frameseq
  3998. The views are temporally interleaved.
  3999. @end table
  4000. @end table
  4001. Some examples:
  4002. @example
  4003. # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
  4004. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  4005. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
  4006. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  4007. @end example
  4008. @section framestep
  4009. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  4010. This filter accepts the following option:
  4011. @table @option
  4012. @item step
  4013. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  4014. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  4015. @end table
  4016. @anchor{frei0r}
  4017. @section frei0r
  4018. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  4019. To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
  4020. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  4021. It accepts the following parameters:
  4022. @table @option
  4023. @item filter_name
  4024. The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  4025. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
  4026. directories specified by the colon-separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH}.
  4027. Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
  4028. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  4029. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  4030. @item filter_params
  4031. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  4032. @end table
  4033. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
  4034. "y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
  4035. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, where @var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} are floating point
  4036. numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  4037. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as @var{X}/@var{Y}, where
  4038. @var{X} and @var{Y} are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
  4039. The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  4040. effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
  4041. @subsection Examples
  4042. @itemize
  4043. @item
  4044. Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
  4045. @example
  4046. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  4047. @end example
  4048. @item
  4049. Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
  4050. @example
  4051. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  4052. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  4053. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  4054. @end example
  4055. @item
  4056. Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
  4057. positions:
  4058. @example
  4059. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  4060. @end example
  4061. @end itemize
  4062. For more information, see
  4063. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  4064. @section fspp
  4065. Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of @ref{spp}.
  4066. It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
  4067. processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
  4068. This allows for much higher speed.
  4069. The filter accepts the following options:
  4070. @table @option
  4071. @item quality
  4072. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  4073. an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is @code{4}.
  4074. @item qp
  4075. Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
  4076. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
  4077. @item strength
  4078. Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
  4079. more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
  4080. but also blurrier. Default value is @code{0} − PSNR optimal.
  4081. @item use_bframe_qp
  4082. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  4083. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  4084. @code{0} (not enabled).
  4085. @end table
  4086. @section geq
  4087. The filter accepts the following options:
  4088. @table @option
  4089. @item lum_expr, lum
  4090. Set the luminance expression.
  4091. @item cb_expr, cb
  4092. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  4093. @item cr_expr, cr
  4094. Set the chrominance red expression.
  4095. @item alpha_expr, a
  4096. Set the alpha expression.
  4097. @item red_expr, r
  4098. Set the red expression.
  4099. @item green_expr, g
  4100. Set the green expression.
  4101. @item blue_expr, b
  4102. Set the blue expression.
  4103. @end table
  4104. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  4105. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  4106. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  4107. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  4108. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  4109. colorspace.
  4110. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  4111. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  4112. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  4113. to the luminance expression.
  4114. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  4115. @table @option
  4116. @item N
  4117. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  4118. @item X
  4119. @item Y
  4120. The coordinates of the current sample.
  4121. @item W
  4122. @item H
  4123. The width and height of the image.
  4124. @item SW
  4125. @item SH
  4126. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  4127. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  4128. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  4129. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  4130. @item T
  4131. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  4132. @item p(x, y)
  4133. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  4134. plane.
  4135. @item lum(x, y)
  4136. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  4137. plane.
  4138. @item cb(x, y)
  4139. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  4140. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  4141. @item cr(x, y)
  4142. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  4143. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  4144. @item r(x, y)
  4145. @item g(x, y)
  4146. @item b(x, y)
  4147. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  4148. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  4149. @item alpha(x, y)
  4150. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  4151. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  4152. @end table
  4153. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  4154. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  4155. @subsection Examples
  4156. @itemize
  4157. @item
  4158. Flip the image horizontally:
  4159. @example
  4160. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  4161. @end example
  4162. @item
  4163. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  4164. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  4165. @example
  4166. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  4167. @end example
  4168. @item
  4169. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  4170. @example
  4171. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  4172. @end example
  4173. @item
  4174. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  4175. @example
  4176. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  4177. @end example
  4178. @item
  4179. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  4180. @example
  4181. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  4182. @end example
  4183. @item
  4184. Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
  4185. the @ref{vignette} filter):
  4186. @example
  4187. geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
  4188. @end example
  4189. @item
  4190. Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
  4191. compose with @ref{overlay}. In this example the video will gradually
  4192. become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
  4193. by the linear gradient:
  4194. @example
  4195. ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
  4196. @end example
  4197. @end itemize
  4198. @section gradfun
  4199. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  4200. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  4201. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  4202. dither them.
  4203. It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  4204. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  4205. bring back the bands.
  4206. It accepts the following parameters:
  4207. @table @option
  4208. @item strength
  4209. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
  4210. the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
  4211. .51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
  4212. valid range.
  4213. @item radius
  4214. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  4215. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  4216. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
  4217. values will be clipped to the valid range.
  4218. @end table
  4219. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  4220. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  4221. @subsection Examples
  4222. @itemize
  4223. @item
  4224. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  4225. @example
  4226. gradfun=3.5:8
  4227. @end example
  4228. @item
  4229. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  4230. value):
  4231. @example
  4232. gradfun=radius=8
  4233. @end example
  4234. @end itemize
  4235. @anchor{haldclut}
  4236. @section haldclut
  4237. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  4238. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  4239. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  4240. The filter accepts the following options:
  4241. @table @option
  4242. @item shortest
  4243. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  4244. @item repeatlast
  4245. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  4246. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  4247. Default is @code{1}.
  4248. @end table
  4249. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  4250. filters share the same internals).
  4251. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  4252. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  4253. @subsection Workflow examples
  4254. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  4255. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  4256. @example
  4257. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  4258. @end example
  4259. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  4260. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  4261. @example
  4262. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  4263. @end example
  4264. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  4265. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  4266. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  4267. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  4268. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  4269. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  4270. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  4271. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  4272. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  4273. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  4274. @code{haldclut} filter:
  4275. @example
  4276. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  4277. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  4278. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  4279. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  4280. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  4281. @end example
  4282. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  4283. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  4284. the color changes.
  4285. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  4286. @example
  4287. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  4288. @end example
  4289. @section hflip
  4290. Flip the input video horizontally.
  4291. For example, to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  4292. @example
  4293. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  4294. @end example
  4295. @section histeq
  4296. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  4297. per-frame basis.
  4298. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  4299. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  4300. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  4301. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  4302. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  4303. video.
  4304. The filter accepts the following options:
  4305. @table @option
  4306. @item strength
  4307. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  4308. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  4309. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  4310. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  4311. @item intensity
  4312. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  4313. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  4314. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  4315. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  4316. @item antibanding
  4317. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  4318. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  4319. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  4320. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  4321. @end table
  4322. @section histogram
  4323. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  4324. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  4325. distribution in an image.
  4326. The filter accepts the following options:
  4327. @table @option
  4328. @item mode
  4329. Set histogram mode.
  4330. It accepts the following values:
  4331. @table @samp
  4332. @item levels
  4333. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  4334. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  4335. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  4336. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  4337. @item color
  4338. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  4339. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  4340. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  4341. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  4342. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  4343. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  4344. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  4345. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  4346. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  4347. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  4348. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  4349. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  4350. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  4351. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  4352. the edge of the square.
  4353. @item color2
  4354. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  4355. are displayed.
  4356. @item waveform
  4357. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  4358. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  4359. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  4360. side represents value = 255.
  4361. @end table
  4362. Default value is @code{levels}.
  4363. @item level_height
  4364. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  4365. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  4366. @item scale_height
  4367. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  4368. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  4369. @item step
  4370. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  4371. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  4372. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  4373. @item waveform_mode
  4374. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  4375. Default is @code{row}.
  4376. @item waveform_mirror
  4377. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  4378. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  4379. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  4380. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  4381. @item display_mode
  4382. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  4383. It accepts the following values:
  4384. @table @samp
  4385. @item parade
  4386. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  4387. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  4388. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  4389. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  4390. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  4391. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  4392. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  4393. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  4394. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  4395. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  4396. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  4397. @item overlay
  4398. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  4399. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  4400. over one another.
  4401. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  4402. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  4403. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  4404. or blacks.
  4405. @end table
  4406. Default is @code{parade}.
  4407. @item levels_mode
  4408. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  4409. Default is @code{linear}.
  4410. @end table
  4411. @subsection Examples
  4412. @itemize
  4413. @item
  4414. Calculate and draw histogram:
  4415. @example
  4416. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  4417. @end example
  4418. @end itemize
  4419. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  4420. @section hqdn3d
  4421. This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
  4422. image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
  4423. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  4424. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4425. @table @option
  4426. @item luma_spatial
  4427. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
  4428. It defaults to 4.0.
  4429. @item chroma_spatial
  4430. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
  4431. It defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4432. @item luma_tmp
  4433. A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4434. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4435. @item chroma_tmp
  4436. A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4437. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}.
  4438. @end table
  4439. @section hqx
  4440. Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
  4441. was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
  4442. It accepts the following option:
  4443. @table @option
  4444. @item n
  4445. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{hq2x}, @code{3} for
  4446. @code{hq3x} and @code{4} for @code{hq4x}.
  4447. Default is @code{3}.
  4448. @end table
  4449. @section hue
  4450. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  4451. It accepts the following parameters:
  4452. @table @option
  4453. @item h
  4454. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  4455. and defaults to "0".
  4456. @item s
  4457. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4458. defaults to "1".
  4459. @item H
  4460. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  4461. expression, and defaults to "0".
  4462. @item b
  4463. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4464. defaults to "0".
  4465. @end table
  4466. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  4467. specified at the same time.
  4468. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  4469. expressions containing the following constants:
  4470. @table @option
  4471. @item n
  4472. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  4473. @item pts
  4474. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  4475. @item r
  4476. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  4477. @item t
  4478. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4479. @item tb
  4480. time base of the input video
  4481. @end table
  4482. @subsection Examples
  4483. @itemize
  4484. @item
  4485. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  4486. @example
  4487. hue=h=90:s=1
  4488. @end example
  4489. @item
  4490. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  4491. @example
  4492. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  4493. @end example
  4494. @item
  4495. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  4496. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  4497. @example
  4498. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  4499. @end example
  4500. @item
  4501. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  4502. @example
  4503. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  4504. @end example
  4505. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  4506. @example
  4507. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  4508. @end example
  4509. @item
  4510. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  4511. @example
  4512. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  4513. @end example
  4514. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  4515. @example
  4516. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  4517. @end example
  4518. @end itemize
  4519. @subsection Commands
  4520. This filter supports the following commands:
  4521. @table @option
  4522. @item b
  4523. @item s
  4524. @item h
  4525. @item H
  4526. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  4527. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4528. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4529. value.
  4530. @end table
  4531. @section idet
  4532. Detect video interlacing type.
  4533. This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
  4534. top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
  4535. repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
  4536. Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
  4537. Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
  4538. The filter will log these metadata values:
  4539. @table @option
  4540. @item single.current_frame
  4541. Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
  4542. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4543. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4544. @item single.tff
  4545. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
  4546. @item multiple.tff
  4547. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4548. @item single.bff
  4549. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
  4550. @item multiple.current_frame
  4551. Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
  4552. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4553. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4554. @item multiple.bff
  4555. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4556. @item single.progressive
  4557. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
  4558. @item multiple.progressive
  4559. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
  4560. @item single.undetermined
  4561. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
  4562. @item multiple.undetermined
  4563. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
  4564. @item repeated.current_frame
  4565. Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of ``neither'', ``top'', or ``bottom''.
  4566. @item repeated.neither
  4567. Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
  4568. @item repeated.top
  4569. Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame's top field.
  4570. @item repeated.bottom
  4571. Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame's bottom field.
  4572. @end table
  4573. The filter accepts the following options:
  4574. @table @option
  4575. @item intl_thres
  4576. Set interlacing threshold.
  4577. @item prog_thres
  4578. Set progressive threshold.
  4579. @item repeat_thres
  4580. Threshold for repeated field detection.
  4581. @item half_life
  4582. Number of frames after which a given frame's contribution to the
  4583. statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it's
  4584. classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
  4585. full weight of 1.0 forever.
  4586. @item analyze_interlaced_flag
  4587. When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
  4588. if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
  4589. If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
  4590. computations, if it is found to be inaccuarte it will be cleared without any
  4591. further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
  4592. method to clean up the interlaced flag
  4593. @end table
  4594. @section il
  4595. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4596. This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
  4597. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4598. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4599. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4600. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4601. The filter accepts the following options:
  4602. @table @option
  4603. @item luma_mode, l
  4604. @item chroma_mode, c
  4605. @item alpha_mode, a
  4606. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4607. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4608. @table @samp
  4609. @item none
  4610. Do nothing.
  4611. @item deinterleave, d
  4612. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4613. @item interleave, i
  4614. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4615. @end table
  4616. Default value is @code{none}.
  4617. @item luma_swap, ls
  4618. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4619. @item alpha_swap, as
  4620. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4621. @end table
  4622. @section interlace
  4623. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4624. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4625. halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
  4626. @example
  4627. Original Original New Frame
  4628. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4629. ========== =========== ==================
  4630. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4631. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4632. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4633. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4634. ... ... ...
  4635. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4636. @end example
  4637. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4638. @table @option
  4639. @item scan
  4640. This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
  4641. (tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4642. @item lowpass
  4643. Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
  4644. interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
  4645. @end table
  4646. @section kerndeint
  4647. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4648. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4649. progressive frames.
  4650. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4651. @table @option
  4652. @item thresh
  4653. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4654. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4655. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4656. applying the process on every pixels.
  4657. @item map
  4658. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4659. Default is 0.
  4660. @item order
  4661. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4662. 0. Default is 0.
  4663. @item sharp
  4664. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4665. @item twoway
  4666. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4667. @end table
  4668. @subsection Examples
  4669. @itemize
  4670. @item
  4671. Apply default values:
  4672. @example
  4673. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4674. @end example
  4675. @item
  4676. Enable additional sharpening:
  4677. @example
  4678. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4679. @end example
  4680. @item
  4681. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4682. @example
  4683. kerndeint=map=1
  4684. @end example
  4685. @end itemize
  4686. @section lenscorrection
  4687. Correct radial lens distortion
  4688. This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
  4689. of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
  4690. one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
  4691. To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
  4692. and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
  4693. Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
  4694. Digikam from the KDE project.
  4695. In contrast to the @ref{vignette} filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
  4696. this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas @ref{vignette} corrects the
  4697. brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
  4698. cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
  4699. be applied before or after lens correction.
  4700. @subsection Options
  4701. The filter accepts the following options:
  4702. @table @option
  4703. @item cx
  4704. Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4705. distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4706. width.
  4707. @item cy
  4708. Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4709. distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4710. height.
  4711. @item k1
  4712. Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4713. @item k2
  4714. Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4715. @end table
  4716. The formula that generates the correction is:
  4717. @var{r_src} = @var{r_tgt} * (1 + @var{k1} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^2 + @var{k2} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^4)
  4718. where @var{r_0} is halve of the image diagonal and @var{r_src} and @var{r_tgt} are the
  4719. distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
  4720. @anchor{lut3d}
  4721. @section lut3d
  4722. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4723. The filter accepts the following options:
  4724. @table @option
  4725. @item file
  4726. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4727. Currently supported formats:
  4728. @table @samp
  4729. @item 3dl
  4730. AfterEffects
  4731. @item cube
  4732. Iridas
  4733. @item dat
  4734. DaVinci
  4735. @item m3d
  4736. Pandora
  4737. @end table
  4738. @item interp
  4739. Select interpolation mode.
  4740. Available values are:
  4741. @table @samp
  4742. @item nearest
  4743. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4744. @item trilinear
  4745. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4746. @item tetrahedral
  4747. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4748. @end table
  4749. @end table
  4750. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4751. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4752. to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
  4753. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4754. to an RGB input video.
  4755. These filters accept the following parameters:
  4756. @table @option
  4757. @item c0
  4758. set first pixel component expression
  4759. @item c1
  4760. set second pixel component expression
  4761. @item c2
  4762. set third pixel component expression
  4763. @item c3
  4764. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4765. @item r
  4766. set red component expression
  4767. @item g
  4768. set green component expression
  4769. @item b
  4770. set blue component expression
  4771. @item a
  4772. alpha component expression
  4773. @item y
  4774. set Y/luminance component expression
  4775. @item u
  4776. set U/Cb component expression
  4777. @item v
  4778. set V/Cr component expression
  4779. @end table
  4780. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4781. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4782. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4783. format in input.
  4784. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4785. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4786. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4787. @table @option
  4788. @item w
  4789. @item h
  4790. The input width and height.
  4791. @item val
  4792. The input value for the pixel component.
  4793. @item clipval
  4794. The input value, clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4795. @item maxval
  4796. The maximum value for the pixel component.
  4797. @item minval
  4798. The minimum value for the pixel component.
  4799. @item negval
  4800. The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
  4801. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range; it corresponds to the expression
  4802. "maxval-clipval+minval".
  4803. @item clip(val)
  4804. The computed value in @var{val}, clipped to the
  4805. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4806. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4807. The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
  4808. clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range. It corresponds to the
  4809. expression
  4810. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4811. @end table
  4812. All expressions default to "val".
  4813. @subsection Examples
  4814. @itemize
  4815. @item
  4816. Negate input video:
  4817. @example
  4818. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4819. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4820. @end example
  4821. The above is the same as:
  4822. @example
  4823. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4824. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4825. @end example
  4826. @item
  4827. Negate luminance:
  4828. @example
  4829. lutyuv=y=negval
  4830. @end example
  4831. @item
  4832. Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
  4833. @example
  4834. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4835. @end example
  4836. @item
  4837. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4838. @example
  4839. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4840. @end example
  4841. @item
  4842. Remove green and blue components:
  4843. @example
  4844. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4845. @end example
  4846. @item
  4847. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4848. @example
  4849. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4850. @end example
  4851. @item
  4852. Correct luminance gamma by a factor of 0.5:
  4853. @example
  4854. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4855. @end example
  4856. @item
  4857. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4858. @example
  4859. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4860. @end example
  4861. @end itemize
  4862. @section mergeplanes
  4863. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4864. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4865. planes to the output video.
  4866. This filter accepts the following options:
  4867. @table @option
  4868. @item mapping
  4869. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4870. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4871. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4872. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4873. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4874. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4875. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4876. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4877. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4878. @item format
  4879. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4880. @end table
  4881. @subsection Examples
  4882. @itemize
  4883. @item
  4884. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4885. @example
  4886. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4887. @end example
  4888. @item
  4889. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4890. @example
  4891. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4892. @end example
  4893. @item
  4894. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4895. @example
  4896. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4897. @end example
  4898. @item
  4899. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4900. @example
  4901. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4902. @end example
  4903. @item
  4904. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4905. @example
  4906. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4907. @end example
  4908. @end itemize
  4909. @section mcdeint
  4910. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4911. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4912. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4913. This filter accepts the following options:
  4914. @table @option
  4915. @item mode
  4916. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4917. It accepts one of the following values:
  4918. @table @samp
  4919. @item fast
  4920. @item medium
  4921. @item slow
  4922. use iterative motion estimation
  4923. @item extra_slow
  4924. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4925. @end table
  4926. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4927. @item parity
  4928. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4929. one of the following values:
  4930. @table @samp
  4931. @item 0, tff
  4932. assume top field first
  4933. @item 1, bff
  4934. assume bottom field first
  4935. @end table
  4936. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4937. @item qp
  4938. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4939. encoder.
  4940. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4941. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4942. @end table
  4943. @section mpdecimate
  4944. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4945. order to reduce frame rate.
  4946. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4947. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4948. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4949. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4950. @table @option
  4951. @item max
  4952. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4953. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4954. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4955. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4956. Default value is 0.
  4957. @item hi
  4958. @item lo
  4959. @item frac
  4960. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4961. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4962. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4963. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4964. out differently over the block.
  4965. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4966. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4967. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4968. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4969. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4970. @end table
  4971. @section negate
  4972. Negate input video.
  4973. It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
  4974. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4975. @section noformat
  4976. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4977. input to the next filter.
  4978. It accepts the following parameters:
  4979. @table @option
  4980. @item pix_fmts
  4981. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  4982. apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4983. @end table
  4984. @subsection Examples
  4985. @itemize
  4986. @item
  4987. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4988. input to the vflip filter:
  4989. @example
  4990. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4991. @end example
  4992. @item
  4993. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4994. @example
  4995. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4996. @end example
  4997. @end itemize
  4998. @section noise
  4999. Add noise on video input frame.
  5000. The filter accepts the following options:
  5001. @table @option
  5002. @item all_seed
  5003. @item c0_seed
  5004. @item c1_seed
  5005. @item c2_seed
  5006. @item c3_seed
  5007. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  5008. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  5009. @item all_strength, alls
  5010. @item c0_strength, c0s
  5011. @item c1_strength, c1s
  5012. @item c2_strength, c2s
  5013. @item c3_strength, c3s
  5014. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  5015. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  5016. @item all_flags, allf
  5017. @item c0_flags, c0f
  5018. @item c1_flags, c1f
  5019. @item c2_flags, c2f
  5020. @item c3_flags, c3f
  5021. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  5022. Available values for component flags are:
  5023. @table @samp
  5024. @item a
  5025. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  5026. @item p
  5027. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  5028. @item t
  5029. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  5030. @item u
  5031. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  5032. @end table
  5033. @end table
  5034. @subsection Examples
  5035. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  5036. @example
  5037. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  5038. @end example
  5039. @section null
  5040. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  5041. @section ocv
  5042. Apply a video transform using libopencv.
  5043. To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
  5044. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  5045. It accepts the following parameters:
  5046. @table @option
  5047. @item filter_name
  5048. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  5049. @item filter_params
  5050. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
  5051. values are assumed.
  5052. @end table
  5053. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  5054. information:
  5055. @url{http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html}
  5056. Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
  5057. @anchor{dilate}
  5058. @subsection dilate
  5059. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  5060. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  5061. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  5062. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  5063. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  5064. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  5065. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  5066. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element. @var{shape}
  5067. must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
  5068. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  5069. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  5070. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  5071. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  5072. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  5073. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  5074. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  5075. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  5076. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  5077. Some examples:
  5078. @example
  5079. # Use the default values
  5080. ocv=dilate
  5081. # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
  5082. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  5083. # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
  5084. # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
  5085. # *
  5086. # ***
  5087. # *****
  5088. # ***
  5089. # *
  5090. # The specified columns and rows are ignored
  5091. # but the anchor point coordinates are not
  5092. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  5093. @end example
  5094. @subsection erode
  5095. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  5096. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  5097. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  5098. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  5099. @subsection smooth
  5100. Smooth the input video.
  5101. The filter takes the following parameters:
  5102. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  5103. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
  5104. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  5105. or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  5106. The meaning of @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4}
  5107. depend on the smooth type. @var{param1} and
  5108. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0. @var{param3} and
  5109. @var{param4} accept floating point values.
  5110. The default value for @var{param1} is 3. The default value for the
  5111. other parameters is 0.
  5112. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  5113. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  5114. @anchor{overlay}
  5115. @section overlay
  5116. Overlay one video on top of another.
  5117. It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
  5118. video on which the second input is overlaid.
  5119. It accepts the following parameters:
  5120. A description of the accepted options follows.
  5121. @table @option
  5122. @item x
  5123. @item y
  5124. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
  5125. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  5126. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  5127. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  5128. @item eof_action
  5129. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
  5130. one of the following values:
  5131. @table @option
  5132. @item repeat
  5133. Repeat the last frame (the default).
  5134. @item endall
  5135. End both streams.
  5136. @item pass
  5137. Pass the main input through.
  5138. @end table
  5139. @item eval
  5140. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  5141. It accepts the following values:
  5142. @table @samp
  5143. @item init
  5144. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  5145. when a command is processed
  5146. @item frame
  5147. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  5148. @end table
  5149. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  5150. @item shortest
  5151. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  5152. terminates. Default value is 0.
  5153. @item format
  5154. Set the format for the output video.
  5155. It accepts the following values:
  5156. @table @samp
  5157. @item yuv420
  5158. force YUV420 output
  5159. @item yuv422
  5160. force YUV422 output
  5161. @item yuv444
  5162. force YUV444 output
  5163. @item rgb
  5164. force RGB output
  5165. @end table
  5166. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  5167. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  5168. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  5169. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  5170. @option{format} instead.
  5171. @item repeatlast
  5172. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  5173. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  5174. behavior. Default value is 1.
  5175. @end table
  5176. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  5177. parameters.
  5178. @table @option
  5179. @item main_w, W
  5180. @item main_h, H
  5181. The main input width and height.
  5182. @item overlay_w, w
  5183. @item overlay_h, h
  5184. The overlay input width and height.
  5185. @item x
  5186. @item y
  5187. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  5188. each new frame.
  5189. @item hsub
  5190. @item vsub
  5191. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  5192. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  5193. @var{vsub} is 1.
  5194. @item n
  5195. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  5196. @item pos
  5197. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  5198. @item t
  5199. The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  5200. @end table
  5201. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  5202. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  5203. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  5204. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  5205. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  5206. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  5207. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
  5208. the @var{movie} filter does.
  5209. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  5210. efficiency of such approach.
  5211. @subsection Commands
  5212. This filter supports the following commands:
  5213. @table @option
  5214. @item x
  5215. @item y
  5216. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  5217. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5218. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5219. value.
  5220. @end table
  5221. @subsection Examples
  5222. @itemize
  5223. @item
  5224. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  5225. video:
  5226. @example
  5227. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  5228. @end example
  5229. Using named options the example above becomes:
  5230. @example
  5231. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  5232. @end example
  5233. @item
  5234. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  5235. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  5236. @example
  5237. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  5238. @end example
  5239. @item
  5240. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  5241. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  5242. @example
  5243. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  5244. @end example
  5245. @item
  5246. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; @code{WxH}
  5247. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  5248. @example
  5249. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  5250. @end example
  5251. @item
  5252. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  5253. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  5254. @example
  5255. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  5256. @end example
  5257. The above command is the same as:
  5258. @example
  5259. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  5260. @end example
  5261. @item
  5262. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  5263. screen starting since time 2:
  5264. @example
  5265. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  5266. @end example
  5267. @item
  5268. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  5269. @example
  5270. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  5271. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  5272. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  5273. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  5274. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  5275. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  5276. "
  5277. @end example
  5278. @item
  5279. Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  5280. @example
  5281. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  5282. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  5283. masked.avi
  5284. @end example
  5285. @item
  5286. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  5287. @example
  5288. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  5289. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  5290. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  5291. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  5292. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  5293. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  5294. @end example
  5295. @end itemize
  5296. @section owdenoise
  5297. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  5298. The filter accepts the following options:
  5299. @table @option
  5300. @item depth
  5301. Set depth.
  5302. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  5303. slow down filtering.
  5304. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  5305. @item luma_strength, ls
  5306. Set luma strength.
  5307. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5308. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5309. Set chroma strength.
  5310. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5311. @end table
  5312. @section pad
  5313. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  5314. provided @var{x}, @var{y} coordinates.
  5315. It accepts the following parameters:
  5316. @table @option
  5317. @item width, w
  5318. @item height, h
  5319. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  5320. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  5321. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  5322. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  5323. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  5324. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  5325. @item x
  5326. @item y
  5327. Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
  5328. with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
  5329. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  5330. expression, and vice versa.
  5331. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  5332. @item color
  5333. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  5334. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5335. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  5336. @end table
  5337. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  5338. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  5339. @table @option
  5340. @item in_w
  5341. @item in_h
  5342. The input video width and height.
  5343. @item iw
  5344. @item ih
  5345. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5346. @item out_w
  5347. @item out_h
  5348. The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
  5349. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions.
  5350. @item ow
  5351. @item oh
  5352. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  5353. @item x
  5354. @item y
  5355. The x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  5356. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
  5357. @item a
  5358. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5359. @item sar
  5360. input sample aspect ratio
  5361. @item dar
  5362. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  5363. @item hsub
  5364. @item vsub
  5365. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5366. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5367. @end table
  5368. @subsection Examples
  5369. @itemize
  5370. @item
  5371. Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
  5372. size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  5373. column 0, row 40
  5374. @example
  5375. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  5376. @end example
  5377. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  5378. @example
  5379. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  5380. @end example
  5381. @item
  5382. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  5383. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  5384. @example
  5385. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5386. @end example
  5387. @item
  5388. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  5389. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  5390. the center of the padded area:
  5391. @example
  5392. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5393. @end example
  5394. @item
  5395. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  5396. @example
  5397. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5398. @end example
  5399. @item
  5400. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  5401. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  5402. according to the relation:
  5403. @example
  5404. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  5405. X = output_dar / sar
  5406. @end example
  5407. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  5408. @example
  5409. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5410. @end example
  5411. @item
  5412. Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  5413. corner of the output padded area:
  5414. @example
  5415. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  5416. @end example
  5417. @end itemize
  5418. @anchor{palettegen}
  5419. @section palettegen
  5420. Generate one palette for a whole video stream.
  5421. It accepts the following options:
  5422. @table @option
  5423. @item max_colors
  5424. Set the maximum number of colors to quantize in the palette.
  5425. Note: the palette will still contain 256 colors; the unused palette entries
  5426. will be black.
  5427. @item reserve_transparent
  5428. Create a palette of 255 colors maximum and reserve the last one for
  5429. transparency. Reserving the transparency color is useful for GIF optimization.
  5430. If not set, the maximum of colors in the palette will be 256. You probably want
  5431. to disable this option for a standalone image.
  5432. Set by default.
  5433. @item stats_mode
  5434. Set statistics mode.
  5435. It accepts the following values:
  5436. @table @samp
  5437. @item full
  5438. Compute full frame histograms.
  5439. @item diff
  5440. Compute histograms only for the part that differs from previous frame. This
  5441. might be relevant to give more importance to the moving part of your input if
  5442. the background is static.
  5443. @end table
  5444. Default value is @var{full}.
  5445. @end table
  5446. The filter also exports the frame metadata @code{lavfi.color_quant_ratio}
  5447. (@code{nb_color_in / nb_color_out}) which you can use to evaluate the degree of
  5448. color quantization of the palette. This information is also visible at
  5449. @var{info} logging level.
  5450. @subsection Examples
  5451. @itemize
  5452. @item
  5453. Generate a representative palette of a given video using @command{ffmpeg}:
  5454. @example
  5455. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf palettegen palette.png
  5456. @end example
  5457. @end itemize
  5458. @section paletteuse
  5459. Use a palette to downsample an input video stream.
  5460. The filter takes two inputs: one video stream and a palette. The palette must
  5461. be a 256 pixels image.
  5462. It accepts the following options:
  5463. @table @option
  5464. @item dither
  5465. Select dithering mode. Available algorithms are:
  5466. @table @samp
  5467. @item bayer
  5468. Ordered 8x8 bayer dithering (deterministic)
  5469. @item heckbert
  5470. Dithering as defined by Paul Heckbert in 1982 (simple error diffusion).
  5471. Note: this dithering is sometimes considered "wrong" and is included as a
  5472. reference.
  5473. @item floyd_steinberg
  5474. Floyd and Steingberg dithering (error diffusion)
  5475. @item sierra2
  5476. Frankie Sierra dithering v2 (error diffusion)
  5477. @item sierra2_4a
  5478. Frankie Sierra dithering v2 "Lite" (error diffusion)
  5479. @end table
  5480. Default is @var{sierra2_4a}.
  5481. @item bayer_scale
  5482. When @var{bayer} dithering is selected, this option defines the scale of the
  5483. pattern (how much the crosshatch pattern is visible). A low value means more
  5484. visible pattern for less banding, and higher value means less visible pattern
  5485. at the cost of more banding.
  5486. The option must be an integer value in the range [0,5]. Default is @var{2}.
  5487. @item diff_mode
  5488. If set, define the zone to process
  5489. @table @samp
  5490. @item rectangle
  5491. Only the changing rectangle will be reprocessed. This is similar to GIF
  5492. cropping/offsetting compression mechanism. This option can be useful for speed
  5493. if only a part of the image is changing, and has use cases such as limiting the
  5494. scope of the error diffusal @option{dither} to the rectangle that bounds the
  5495. moving scene (it leads to more deterministic output if the scene doesn't change
  5496. much, and as a result less moving noise and better GIF compression).
  5497. @end table
  5498. Default is @var{none}.
  5499. @end table
  5500. @subsection Examples
  5501. @itemize
  5502. @item
  5503. Use a palette (generated for example with @ref{palettegen}) to encode a GIF
  5504. using @command{ffmpeg}:
  5505. @example
  5506. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -i palette.png -lavfi paletteuse output.gif
  5507. @end example
  5508. @end itemize
  5509. @section perspective
  5510. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  5511. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5512. @table @option
  5513. @item x0
  5514. @item y0
  5515. @item x1
  5516. @item y1
  5517. @item x2
  5518. @item y2
  5519. @item x3
  5520. @item y3
  5521. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  5522. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  5523. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{source}, then the specified points will be sent
  5524. to the corners of the destination. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{destination},
  5525. then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
  5526. The expressions can use the following variables:
  5527. @table @option
  5528. @item W
  5529. @item H
  5530. the width and height of video frame.
  5531. @end table
  5532. @item interpolation
  5533. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  5534. It accepts the following values:
  5535. @table @samp
  5536. @item linear
  5537. @item cubic
  5538. @end table
  5539. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  5540. @item sense
  5541. Set interpretation of coordinate options.
  5542. It accepts the following values:
  5543. @table @samp
  5544. @item 0, source
  5545. Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
  5546. the corners of the destination.
  5547. @item 1, destination
  5548. Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
  5549. by the given coordinates.
  5550. Default value is @samp{source}.
  5551. @end table
  5552. @end table
  5553. @section phase
  5554. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  5555. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  5556. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  5557. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5558. @table @option
  5559. @item mode
  5560. Set phase mode.
  5561. It accepts the following values:
  5562. @table @samp
  5563. @item t
  5564. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  5565. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  5566. @item b
  5567. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  5568. Filter will delay the top field.
  5569. @item p
  5570. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  5571. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  5572. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  5573. @item a
  5574. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  5575. opposite.
  5576. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  5577. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  5578. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  5579. @item u
  5580. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  5581. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  5582. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  5583. match between the fields.
  5584. @item T
  5585. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5586. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5587. @item B
  5588. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5589. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5590. @item A
  5591. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  5592. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  5593. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  5594. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  5595. @item U
  5596. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  5597. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  5598. @end table
  5599. @end table
  5600. @section pixdesctest
  5601. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  5602. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  5603. For example:
  5604. @example
  5605. format=monow, pixdesctest
  5606. @end example
  5607. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  5608. @section pp
  5609. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  5610. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  5611. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  5612. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  5613. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  5614. The filters accept the following options:
  5615. @table @option
  5616. @item subfilters
  5617. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  5618. @end table
  5619. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  5620. @table @option
  5621. @item a/autoq
  5622. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  5623. @item c/chrom
  5624. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  5625. @item y/nochrom
  5626. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  5627. @item n/noluma
  5628. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  5629. @end table
  5630. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  5631. Available subfilters are:
  5632. @table @option
  5633. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5634. Horizontal deblocking filter
  5635. @table @option
  5636. @item difference
  5637. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5638. @item flatness
  5639. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5640. @end table
  5641. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5642. Vertical deblocking filter
  5643. @table @option
  5644. @item difference
  5645. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5646. @item flatness
  5647. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5648. @end table
  5649. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5650. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  5651. @table @option
  5652. @item difference
  5653. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5654. @item flatness
  5655. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5656. @end table
  5657. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5658. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  5659. @table @option
  5660. @item difference
  5661. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5662. @item flatness
  5663. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5664. @end table
  5665. @end table
  5666. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  5667. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  5668. thresholds.
  5669. @table @option
  5670. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  5671. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  5672. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  5673. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  5674. @item dr/dering
  5675. Deringing filter
  5676. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  5677. @table @option
  5678. @item threshold1
  5679. larger -> stronger filtering
  5680. @item threshold2
  5681. larger -> stronger filtering
  5682. @item threshold3
  5683. larger -> stronger filtering
  5684. @end table
  5685. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  5686. @table @option
  5687. @item f/fullyrange
  5688. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  5689. @end table
  5690. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5691. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5692. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5693. @item li/linipoldeint
  5694. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5695. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5696. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5697. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5698. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5699. @item md/mediandeint
  5700. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5701. median filter to every second line.
  5702. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5703. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5704. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5705. @item l5/lowpass5
  5706. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5707. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5708. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5709. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5710. specify.
  5711. @table @option
  5712. @item quantizer
  5713. Quantizer to use
  5714. @end table
  5715. @item de/default
  5716. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5717. @item fa/fast
  5718. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5719. @item ac
  5720. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5721. @end table
  5722. @subsection Examples
  5723. @itemize
  5724. @item
  5725. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5726. brightness/contrast:
  5727. @example
  5728. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5729. @end example
  5730. @item
  5731. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5732. @example
  5733. pp=de/-al
  5734. @end example
  5735. @item
  5736. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5737. @example
  5738. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5739. @end example
  5740. @item
  5741. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5742. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5743. @example
  5744. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5745. @end example
  5746. @end itemize
  5747. @section pp7
  5748. Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the @ref{spp} filter,
  5749. similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
  5750. used after IDCT.
  5751. The filter accepts the following options:
  5752. @table @option
  5753. @item qp
  5754. Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
  5755. 0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
  5756. (if available).
  5757. @item mode
  5758. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  5759. @table @samp
  5760. @item hard
  5761. Set hard thresholding.
  5762. @item soft
  5763. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  5764. @item medium
  5765. Set medium thresholding (good results, default).
  5766. @end table
  5767. @end table
  5768. @section psnr
  5769. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5770. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5771. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5772. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5773. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5774. the PSNR.
  5775. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5776. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5777. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5778. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5779. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5780. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5781. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5782. @example
  5783. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5784. @end example
  5785. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5786. image.
  5787. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5788. @table @option
  5789. @item stats_file, f
  5790. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5791. each individual frame.
  5792. @end table
  5793. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5794. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5795. couple of frames.
  5796. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5797. @table @option
  5798. @item n
  5799. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5800. @item mse_avg
  5801. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5802. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5803. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5804. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5805. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5806. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5807. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5808. specified by the suffix.
  5809. @end table
  5810. For example:
  5811. @example
  5812. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5813. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5814. @end example
  5815. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5816. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5817. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5818. @anchor{pullup}
  5819. @section pullup
  5820. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5821. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5822. content.
  5823. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5824. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5825. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5826. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5827. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5828. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5829. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5830. The filter accepts the following options:
  5831. @table @option
  5832. @item jl
  5833. @item jr
  5834. @item jt
  5835. @item jb
  5836. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5837. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5838. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5839. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5840. @item sb
  5841. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5842. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5843. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5844. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5845. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5846. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5847. Default value is @code{0}.
  5848. @item mp
  5849. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5850. @table @samp
  5851. @item l
  5852. Use luma plane.
  5853. @item u
  5854. Use chroma blue plane.
  5855. @item v
  5856. Use chroma red plane.
  5857. @end table
  5858. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5859. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5860. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5861. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5862. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5863. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5864. @end table
  5865. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5866. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5867. telecine NTSC input:
  5868. @example
  5869. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5870. @end example
  5871. @section qp
  5872. Change video quantization parameters (QP).
  5873. The filter accepts the following option:
  5874. @table @option
  5875. @item qp
  5876. Set expression for quantization parameter.
  5877. @end table
  5878. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
  5879. the following constants:
  5880. @table @var
  5881. @item known
  5882. 1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.
  5883. @item qp
  5884. Sequentional index starting from -129 to 128.
  5885. @end table
  5886. @subsection Examples
  5887. @itemize
  5888. @item
  5889. Some equation like:
  5890. @example
  5891. qp=2+2*sin(PI*qp)
  5892. @end example
  5893. @end itemize
  5894. @section removelogo
  5895. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5896. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5897. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5898. The filter accepts the following options:
  5899. @table @option
  5900. @item filename, f
  5901. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5902. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5903. video stream being processed.
  5904. @end table
  5905. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5906. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5907. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5908. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5909. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5910. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5911. filter once or twice.
  5912. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5913. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5914. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5915. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5916. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5917. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5918. @section repeatfields
  5919. This filter uses the repeat_field flag from the Video ES headers and hard repeats
  5920. fields based on its value.
  5921. @section rotate
  5922. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5923. The filter accepts the following options:
  5924. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5925. @table @option
  5926. @item angle, a
  5927. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5928. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5929. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5930. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5931. @item out_w, ow
  5932. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5933. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5934. @item out_h, oh
  5935. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5936. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5937. @item bilinear
  5938. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5939. it. Default value is 1.
  5940. @item fillcolor, c
  5941. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5942. image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5943. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5944. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5945. Default value is "black".
  5946. @end table
  5947. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5948. following constants and functions:
  5949. @table @option
  5950. @item n
  5951. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5952. before the first frame is filtered.
  5953. @item t
  5954. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5955. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5956. @item hsub
  5957. @item vsub
  5958. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5959. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5960. @item in_w, iw
  5961. @item in_h, ih
  5962. the input video width and height
  5963. @item out_w, ow
  5964. @item out_h, oh
  5965. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5966. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5967. @item rotw(a)
  5968. @item roth(a)
  5969. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5970. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5971. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5972. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5973. @end table
  5974. @subsection Examples
  5975. @itemize
  5976. @item
  5977. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5978. @example
  5979. rotate=PI/6
  5980. @end example
  5981. @item
  5982. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5983. @example
  5984. rotate=-PI/6
  5985. @end example
  5986. @item
  5987. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5988. @example
  5989. rotate=45*PI/180
  5990. @end example
  5991. @item
  5992. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5993. @example
  5994. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5995. @end example
  5996. @item
  5997. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5998. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5999. @example
  6000. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  6001. @end example
  6002. @item
  6003. Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
  6004. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  6005. @example
  6006. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  6007. @end example
  6008. @item
  6009. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  6010. shown:
  6011. @example
  6012. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  6013. @end example
  6014. @end itemize
  6015. @subsection Commands
  6016. The filter supports the following commands:
  6017. @table @option
  6018. @item a, angle
  6019. Set the angle expression.
  6020. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  6021. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  6022. value.
  6023. @end table
  6024. @section sab
  6025. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  6026. The filter accepts the following options:
  6027. @table @option
  6028. @item luma_radius, lr
  6029. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  6030. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  6031. in slower processing.
  6032. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  6033. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  6034. value is 1.0.
  6035. @item luma_strength, ls
  6036. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  6037. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  6038. @item chroma_radius, cr
  6039. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  6040. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  6041. processing.
  6042. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  6043. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  6044. @item chroma_strength, cs
  6045. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  6046. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  6047. @end table
  6048. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  6049. corresponding luma option value.
  6050. @anchor{scale}
  6051. @section scale
  6052. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  6053. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  6054. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  6055. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  6056. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  6057. requested format.
  6058. @subsection Options
  6059. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  6060. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  6061. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  6062. the complete list of scaler options.
  6063. @table @option
  6064. @item width, w
  6065. @item height, h
  6066. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  6067. dimension.
  6068. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  6069. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  6070. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  6071. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  6072. used
  6073. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  6074. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  6075. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  6076. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  6077. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  6078. expression.
  6079. @item interl
  6080. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  6081. @table @samp
  6082. @item 1
  6083. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  6084. @item 0
  6085. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  6086. @item -1
  6087. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  6088. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  6089. @end table
  6090. Default value is @samp{0}.
  6091. @item flags
  6092. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  6093. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  6094. complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
  6095. the default flags.
  6096. @item size, s
  6097. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6098. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  6099. @item in_color_matrix
  6100. @item out_color_matrix
  6101. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  6102. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  6103. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  6104. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  6105. Possible values:
  6106. @table @samp
  6107. @item auto
  6108. Choose automatically.
  6109. @item bt709
  6110. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  6111. Recommendation BT.709.
  6112. @item fcc
  6113. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  6114. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  6115. @item bt601
  6116. Set color space conforming to:
  6117. @itemize
  6118. @item
  6119. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  6120. @item
  6121. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  6122. @item
  6123. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  6124. @end itemize
  6125. @item smpte240m
  6126. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  6127. @end table
  6128. @item in_range
  6129. @item out_range
  6130. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  6131. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  6132. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  6133. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  6134. @table @samp
  6135. @item auto
  6136. Choose automatically.
  6137. @item jpeg/full/pc
  6138. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  6139. @item mpeg/tv
  6140. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  6141. @end table
  6142. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  6143. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  6144. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  6145. @table @samp
  6146. @item disable
  6147. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  6148. @item decrease
  6149. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  6150. @item increase
  6151. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  6152. @end table
  6153. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  6154. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  6155. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  6156. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  6157. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  6158. 1280x533.
  6159. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  6160. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  6161. to work.
  6162. @end table
  6163. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  6164. containing the following constants:
  6165. @table @var
  6166. @item in_w
  6167. @item in_h
  6168. The input width and height
  6169. @item iw
  6170. @item ih
  6171. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  6172. @item out_w
  6173. @item out_h
  6174. The output (scaled) width and height
  6175. @item ow
  6176. @item oh
  6177. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  6178. @item a
  6179. The same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  6180. @item sar
  6181. input sample aspect ratio
  6182. @item dar
  6183. The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  6184. @item hsub
  6185. @item vsub
  6186. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  6187. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  6188. @item ohsub
  6189. @item ovsub
  6190. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  6191. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  6192. @end table
  6193. @subsection Examples
  6194. @itemize
  6195. @item
  6196. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
  6197. @example
  6198. scale=w=200:h=100
  6199. @end example
  6200. This is equivalent to:
  6201. @example
  6202. scale=200:100
  6203. @end example
  6204. or:
  6205. @example
  6206. scale=200x100
  6207. @end example
  6208. @item
  6209. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  6210. @example
  6211. scale=qcif
  6212. @end example
  6213. which can also be written as:
  6214. @example
  6215. scale=size=qcif
  6216. @end example
  6217. @item
  6218. Scale the input to 2x:
  6219. @example
  6220. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  6221. @end example
  6222. @item
  6223. The above is the same as:
  6224. @example
  6225. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  6226. @end example
  6227. @item
  6228. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  6229. @example
  6230. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  6231. @end example
  6232. @item
  6233. Scale the input to half size:
  6234. @example
  6235. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  6236. @end example
  6237. @item
  6238. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  6239. @example
  6240. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  6241. @end example
  6242. @item
  6243. Seek Greek harmony:
  6244. @example
  6245. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  6246. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  6247. @end example
  6248. @item
  6249. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  6250. @example
  6251. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  6252. @end example
  6253. @item
  6254. Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
  6255. subsample values:
  6256. @example
  6257. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  6258. @end example
  6259. @item
  6260. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
  6261. keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
  6262. @example
  6263. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  6264. @end example
  6265. @end itemize
  6266. @section separatefields
  6267. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  6268. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  6269. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  6270. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  6271. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  6272. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  6273. @section setdar, setsar
  6274. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  6275. output video.
  6276. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  6277. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  6278. @example
  6279. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  6280. @end example
  6281. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  6282. dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
  6283. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  6284. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  6285. applied.
  6286. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  6287. the filter output video.
  6288. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  6289. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  6290. above.
  6291. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  6292. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  6293. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  6294. It accepts the following parameters:
  6295. @table @option
  6296. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  6297. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  6298. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  6299. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  6300. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  6301. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  6302. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  6303. should be escaped.
  6304. @item max
  6305. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  6306. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  6307. Default value is @code{100}.
  6308. @end table
  6309. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  6310. the following constants:
  6311. @table @option
  6312. @item E, PI, PHI
  6313. These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
  6314. (Euler's number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
  6315. @item w, h
  6316. The input width and height.
  6317. @item a
  6318. These are the same as @var{w} / @var{h}.
  6319. @item sar
  6320. The input sample aspect ratio.
  6321. @item dar
  6322. The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
  6323. (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  6324. @item hsub, vsub
  6325. Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  6326. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  6327. @end table
  6328. @subsection Examples
  6329. @itemize
  6330. @item
  6331. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  6332. @example
  6333. setdar=dar=1.77777
  6334. setdar=dar=16/9
  6335. setdar=dar=1.77777
  6336. @end example
  6337. @item
  6338. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  6339. @example
  6340. setsar=sar=10/11
  6341. @end example
  6342. @item
  6343. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  6344. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  6345. @example
  6346. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  6347. @end example
  6348. @end itemize
  6349. @anchor{setfield}
  6350. @section setfield
  6351. Force field for the output video frame.
  6352. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  6353. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  6354. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  6355. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  6356. The filter accepts the following options:
  6357. @table @option
  6358. @item mode
  6359. Available values are:
  6360. @table @samp
  6361. @item auto
  6362. Keep the same field property.
  6363. @item bff
  6364. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  6365. @item tff
  6366. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  6367. @item prog
  6368. Mark the frame as progressive.
  6369. @end table
  6370. @end table
  6371. @section showinfo
  6372. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  6373. The input video is not modified.
  6374. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  6375. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  6376. The following values are shown in the output:
  6377. @table @option
  6378. @item n
  6379. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  6380. @item pts
  6381. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6382. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  6383. @item pts_time
  6384. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6385. seconds.
  6386. @item pos
  6387. The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
  6388. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
  6389. @item fmt
  6390. The pixel format name.
  6391. @item sar
  6392. The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  6393. @var{num}/@var{den}.
  6394. @item s
  6395. The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6396. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  6397. @item i
  6398. The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  6399. for bottom field first).
  6400. @item iskey
  6401. This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
  6402. @item type
  6403. The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  6404. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
  6405. Also refer to the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  6406. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  6407. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  6408. @item checksum
  6409. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
  6410. @item plane_checksum
  6411. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  6412. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]".
  6413. @end table
  6414. @section showpalette
  6415. Displays the 256 colors palette of each frame. This filter is only relevant for
  6416. @var{pal8} pixel format frames.
  6417. It accepts the following option:
  6418. @table @option
  6419. @item s
  6420. Set the size of the box used to represent one palette color entry. Default is
  6421. @code{30} (for a @code{30x30} pixel box).
  6422. @end table
  6423. @section shuffleplanes
  6424. Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
  6425. It accepts the following parameters:
  6426. @table @option
  6427. @item map0
  6428. The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
  6429. @item map1
  6430. The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
  6431. @item map2
  6432. The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
  6433. @item map3
  6434. The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
  6435. @end table
  6436. The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
  6437. Swap the second and third planes of the input:
  6438. @example
  6439. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
  6440. @end example
  6441. @section signalstats
  6442. Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
  6443. with the digitization of analog video media.
  6444. By default the filter will log these metadata values:
  6445. @table @option
  6446. @item YMIN
  6447. Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6448. range of [0-255].
  6449. @item YLOW
  6450. Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6451. range of [0-255].
  6452. @item YAVG
  6453. Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6454. [0-255].
  6455. @item YHIGH
  6456. Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6457. range of [0-255].
  6458. @item YMAX
  6459. Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6460. range of [0-255].
  6461. @item UMIN
  6462. Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6463. range of [0-255].
  6464. @item ULOW
  6465. Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6466. range of [0-255].
  6467. @item UAVG
  6468. Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6469. [0-255].
  6470. @item UHIGH
  6471. Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6472. range of [0-255].
  6473. @item UMAX
  6474. Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6475. range of [0-255].
  6476. @item VMIN
  6477. Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6478. range of [0-255].
  6479. @item VLOW
  6480. Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6481. range of [0-255].
  6482. @item VAVG
  6483. Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6484. [0-255].
  6485. @item VHIGH
  6486. Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6487. range of [0-255].
  6488. @item VMAX
  6489. Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6490. range of [0-255].
  6491. @item SATMIN
  6492. Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6493. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6494. @item SATLOW
  6495. Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
  6496. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6497. @item SATAVG
  6498. Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
  6499. of [0-~181.02].
  6500. @item SATHIGH
  6501. Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
  6502. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6503. @item SATMAX
  6504. Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6505. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6506. @item HUEMED
  6507. Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6508. [0-360].
  6509. @item HUEAVG
  6510. Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6511. [0-360].
  6512. @item YDIF
  6513. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
  6514. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6515. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6516. @item UDIF
  6517. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
  6518. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6519. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6520. @item VDIF
  6521. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
  6522. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6523. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6524. @end table
  6525. The filter accepts the following options:
  6526. @table @option
  6527. @item stat
  6528. @item out
  6529. @option{stat} specify an additional form of image analysis.
  6530. @option{out} output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
  6531. Both options accept the following values:
  6532. @table @samp
  6533. @item tout
  6534. Identify @var{temporal outliers} pixels. A @var{temporal outlier} is a pixel
  6535. unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
  6536. include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
  6537. @item vrep
  6538. Identify @var{vertical line repetition}. Vertical line repetition includes
  6539. similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
  6540. repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
  6541. analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
  6542. analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
  6543. @item brng
  6544. Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
  6545. @end table
  6546. @item color, c
  6547. Set the highlight color for the @option{out} option. The default color is
  6548. yellow.
  6549. @end table
  6550. @subsection Examples
  6551. @itemize
  6552. @item
  6553. Output data of various video metrics:
  6554. @example
  6555. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames
  6556. @end example
  6557. @item
  6558. Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:
  6559. @example
  6560. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN
  6561. @end example
  6562. @item
  6563. Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.
  6564. @example
  6565. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"
  6566. @end example
  6567. @item
  6568. Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.
  6569. @example
  6570. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt
  6571. @end example
  6572. The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:
  6573. @example
  6574. time %@{pts:hms@}
  6575. Y (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX@})
  6576. U (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX@})
  6577. V (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX@})
  6578. saturation maximum: %@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX@}
  6579. @end example
  6580. @end itemize
  6581. @anchor{smartblur}
  6582. @section smartblur
  6583. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  6584. It accepts the following options:
  6585. @table @option
  6586. @item luma_radius, lr
  6587. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6588. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6589. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6590. @item luma_strength, ls
  6591. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6592. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6593. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6594. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6595. @item luma_threshold, lt
  6596. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6597. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6598. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6599. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6600. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6601. @item chroma_radius, cr
  6602. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6603. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6604. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6605. @item chroma_strength, cs
  6606. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6607. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6608. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6609. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6610. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  6611. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6612. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6613. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6614. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6615. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6616. @end table
  6617. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  6618. is set.
  6619. @section stereo3d
  6620. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  6621. The filters accept the following options:
  6622. @table @option
  6623. @item in
  6624. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  6625. Available values for input image formats are:
  6626. @table @samp
  6627. @item sbsl
  6628. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  6629. @item sbsr
  6630. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  6631. @item sbs2l
  6632. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  6633. (left eye left, right eye right)
  6634. @item sbs2r
  6635. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  6636. (right eye left, left eye right)
  6637. @item abl
  6638. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  6639. @item abr
  6640. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  6641. @item ab2l
  6642. above-below with half height resolution
  6643. (left eye above, right eye below)
  6644. @item ab2r
  6645. above-below with half height resolution
  6646. (right eye above, left eye below)
  6647. @item al
  6648. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  6649. @item ar
  6650. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  6651. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  6652. @end table
  6653. @item out
  6654. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  6655. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  6656. @table @samp
  6657. @item arbg
  6658. anaglyph red/blue gray
  6659. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6660. @item argg
  6661. anaglyph red/green gray
  6662. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  6663. @item arcg
  6664. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  6665. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6666. @item arch
  6667. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  6668. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6669. @item arcc
  6670. anaglyph red/cyan color
  6671. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6672. @item arcd
  6673. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6674. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6675. @item agmg
  6676. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  6677. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6678. @item agmh
  6679. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  6680. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6681. @item agmc
  6682. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  6683. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6684. @item agmd
  6685. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6686. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6687. @item aybg
  6688. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  6689. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6690. @item aybh
  6691. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  6692. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6693. @item aybc
  6694. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  6695. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6696. @item aybd
  6697. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6698. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6699. @item irl
  6700. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  6701. @item irr
  6702. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  6703. @item ml
  6704. mono output (left eye only)
  6705. @item mr
  6706. mono output (right eye only)
  6707. @end table
  6708. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  6709. @end table
  6710. @subsection Examples
  6711. @itemize
  6712. @item
  6713. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  6714. @example
  6715. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  6716. @end example
  6717. @item
  6718. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  6719. @example
  6720. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  6721. @end example
  6722. @end itemize
  6723. @anchor{spp}
  6724. @section spp
  6725. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  6726. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  6727. and average the results.
  6728. The filter accepts the following options:
  6729. @table @option
  6730. @item quality
  6731. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  6732. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  6733. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  6734. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  6735. @code{3}.
  6736. @item qp
  6737. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  6738. from the video stream (if available).
  6739. @item mode
  6740. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  6741. @table @samp
  6742. @item hard
  6743. Set hard thresholding (default).
  6744. @item soft
  6745. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  6746. @end table
  6747. @item use_bframe_qp
  6748. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  6749. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  6750. @code{0} (not enabled).
  6751. @end table
  6752. @anchor{subtitles}
  6753. @section subtitles
  6754. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  6755. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6756. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  6757. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  6758. Alpha) subtitles format.
  6759. The filter accepts the following options:
  6760. @table @option
  6761. @item filename, f
  6762. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  6763. @item original_size
  6764. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  6765. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6766. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  6767. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic, this is necessary to
  6768. correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been changed.
  6769. @item charenc
  6770. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  6771. useful if not UTF-8.
  6772. @item stream_index, si
  6773. Set subtitles stream index. @code{subtitles} filter only.
  6774. @item force_style
  6775. Override default style or script info parameters of the subtitles. It accepts a
  6776. string containing ASS style format @code{KEY=VALUE} couples separated by ",".
  6777. @end table
  6778. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  6779. specifies the @option{filename}.
  6780. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  6781. video, use the command:
  6782. @example
  6783. subtitles=sub.srt
  6784. @end example
  6785. which is equivalent to:
  6786. @example
  6787. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  6788. @end example
  6789. To render the default subtitles stream from file @file{video.mkv}, use:
  6790. @example
  6791. subtitles=video.mkv
  6792. @end example
  6793. To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
  6794. @example
  6795. subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
  6796. @end example
  6797. To make the subtitles stream from @file{sub.srt} appear in transparent green
  6798. @code{DejaVu Serif}, use:
  6799. @example
  6800. subtitles=sub.srt:force_style='FontName=DejaVu Serif,PrimaryColour=&HAA00FF00'
  6801. @end example
  6802. @section super2xsai
  6803. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  6804. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  6805. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  6806. @section swapuv
  6807. Swap U & V plane.
  6808. @section telecine
  6809. Apply telecine process to the video.
  6810. This filter accepts the following options:
  6811. @table @option
  6812. @item first_field
  6813. @table @samp
  6814. @item top, t
  6815. top field first
  6816. @item bottom, b
  6817. bottom field first
  6818. The default value is @code{top}.
  6819. @end table
  6820. @item pattern
  6821. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  6822. The default value is @code{23}.
  6823. @end table
  6824. @example
  6825. Some typical patterns:
  6826. NTSC output (30i):
  6827. 27.5p: 32222
  6828. 24p: 23 (classic)
  6829. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  6830. 20p: 33
  6831. 18p: 334
  6832. 16p: 3444
  6833. PAL output (25i):
  6834. 27.5p: 12222
  6835. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  6836. 16.67p: 33
  6837. 16p: 33333334
  6838. @end example
  6839. @section thumbnail
  6840. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  6841. The filter accepts the following options:
  6842. @table @option
  6843. @item n
  6844. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  6845. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  6846. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  6847. @end table
  6848. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  6849. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  6850. @subsection Examples
  6851. @itemize
  6852. @item
  6853. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  6854. @example
  6855. thumbnail=50
  6856. @end example
  6857. @item
  6858. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6859. @example
  6860. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  6861. @end example
  6862. @end itemize
  6863. @section tile
  6864. Tile several successive frames together.
  6865. The filter accepts the following options:
  6866. @table @option
  6867. @item layout
  6868. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  6869. this option, check the
  6870. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  6871. @item nb_frames
  6872. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  6873. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  6874. the area will be used.
  6875. @item margin
  6876. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  6877. @item padding
  6878. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  6879. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  6880. refer to the pad video filter.
  6881. @item color
  6882. Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6883. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  6884. is "black".
  6885. @end table
  6886. @subsection Examples
  6887. @itemize
  6888. @item
  6889. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  6890. @example
  6891. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  6892. @end example
  6893. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  6894. duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
  6895. rate.
  6896. @item
  6897. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  6898. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  6899. mixed flat and named options:
  6900. @example
  6901. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  6902. @end example
  6903. @end itemize
  6904. @section tinterlace
  6905. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  6906. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  6907. considered odd.
  6908. The filter accepts the following options:
  6909. @table @option
  6910. @item mode
  6911. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  6912. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  6913. Available values are:
  6914. @table @samp
  6915. @item merge, 0
  6916. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  6917. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  6918. @example
  6919. ------> time
  6920. Input:
  6921. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6922. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6923. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6924. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6925. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6926. Output:
  6927. 11111 33333
  6928. 22222 44444
  6929. 11111 33333
  6930. 22222 44444
  6931. 11111 33333
  6932. 22222 44444
  6933. 11111 33333
  6934. 22222 44444
  6935. @end example
  6936. @item drop_odd, 1
  6937. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6938. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6939. @example
  6940. ------> time
  6941. Input:
  6942. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6943. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6944. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6945. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6946. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6947. Output:
  6948. 22222 44444
  6949. 22222 44444
  6950. 22222 44444
  6951. 22222 44444
  6952. @end example
  6953. @item drop_even, 2
  6954. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6955. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6956. @example
  6957. ------> time
  6958. Input:
  6959. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6960. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6961. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6962. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6963. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6964. Output:
  6965. 11111 33333
  6966. 11111 33333
  6967. 11111 33333
  6968. 11111 33333
  6969. @end example
  6970. @item pad, 3
  6971. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6972. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6973. @example
  6974. ------> time
  6975. Input:
  6976. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6977. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6978. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6979. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6980. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6981. Output:
  6982. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6983. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6984. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6985. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6986. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6987. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6988. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6989. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6990. @end example
  6991. @item interleave_top, 4
  6992. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6993. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6994. @example
  6995. ------> time
  6996. Input:
  6997. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6998. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  6999. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  7000. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  7001. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  7002. Output:
  7003. 11111 33333
  7004. 22222 44444
  7005. 11111 33333
  7006. 22222 44444
  7007. @end example
  7008. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  7009. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  7010. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  7011. @example
  7012. ------> time
  7013. Input:
  7014. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  7015. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  7016. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  7017. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  7018. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  7019. Output:
  7020. 22222 44444
  7021. 11111 33333
  7022. 22222 44444
  7023. 11111 33333
  7024. @end example
  7025. @item interlacex2, 6
  7026. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  7027. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  7028. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  7029. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  7030. field synchronisation.
  7031. @example
  7032. ------> time
  7033. Input:
  7034. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  7035. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  7036. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  7037. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  7038. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  7039. Output:
  7040. 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
  7041. 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
  7042. 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
  7043. 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
  7044. @end example
  7045. @end table
  7046. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  7047. compatibility reasons.
  7048. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  7049. @item flags
  7050. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  7051. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  7052. @table @option
  7053. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  7054. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  7055. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  7056. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  7057. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  7058. patterning.
  7059. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  7060. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  7061. @end table
  7062. @end table
  7063. @section transpose
  7064. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  7065. It accepts the following parameters:
  7066. @table @option
  7067. @item dir
  7068. Specify the transposition direction.
  7069. Can assume the following values:
  7070. @table @samp
  7071. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  7072. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  7073. @example
  7074. L.R L.l
  7075. . . -> . .
  7076. l.r R.r
  7077. @end example
  7078. @item 1, 5, clock
  7079. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  7080. @example
  7081. L.R l.L
  7082. . . -> . .
  7083. l.r r.R
  7084. @end example
  7085. @item 2, 6, cclock
  7086. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  7087. @example
  7088. L.R R.r
  7089. . . -> . .
  7090. l.r L.l
  7091. @end example
  7092. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  7093. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  7094. @example
  7095. L.R r.R
  7096. . . -> . .
  7097. l.r l.L
  7098. @end example
  7099. @end table
  7100. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  7101. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  7102. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  7103. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  7104. symbolic constants.
  7105. @item passthrough
  7106. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  7107. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  7108. @table @samp
  7109. @item none
  7110. Always apply transposition.
  7111. @item portrait
  7112. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  7113. @item landscape
  7114. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  7115. @end table
  7116. Default value is @code{none}.
  7117. @end table
  7118. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  7119. layout:
  7120. @example
  7121. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  7122. @end example
  7123. The command above can also be specified as:
  7124. @example
  7125. transpose=1:portrait
  7126. @end example
  7127. @section trim
  7128. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  7129. It accepts the following parameters:
  7130. @table @option
  7131. @item start
  7132. Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  7133. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  7134. @item end
  7135. Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  7136. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  7137. frame in the output.
  7138. @item start_pts
  7139. This is the same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp
  7140. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  7141. @item end_pts
  7142. This is the same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp
  7143. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  7144. @item duration
  7145. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  7146. @item start_frame
  7147. The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
  7148. @item end_frame
  7149. The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  7150. @end table
  7151. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  7152. duration specifications; see
  7153. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7154. for the accepted syntax.
  7155. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  7156. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  7157. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  7158. the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
  7159. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  7160. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  7161. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  7162. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  7163. filters.
  7164. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  7165. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  7166. Examples:
  7167. @itemize
  7168. @item
  7169. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  7170. @example
  7171. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  7172. @end example
  7173. @item
  7174. Keep only the first second:
  7175. @example
  7176. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  7177. @end example
  7178. @end itemize
  7179. @anchor{unsharp}
  7180. @section unsharp
  7181. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  7182. It accepts the following parameters:
  7183. @table @option
  7184. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  7185. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  7186. 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  7187. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  7188. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  7189. and 63. The default value is 5.
  7190. @item luma_amount, la
  7191. Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  7192. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  7193. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  7194. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  7195. Default value is 1.0.
  7196. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  7197. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  7198. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  7199. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  7200. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  7201. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  7202. @item chroma_amount, ca
  7203. Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  7204. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  7205. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  7206. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  7207. Default value is 0.0.
  7208. @item opencl
  7209. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  7210. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  7211. @end table
  7212. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  7213. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  7214. @subsection Examples
  7215. @itemize
  7216. @item
  7217. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  7218. @example
  7219. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  7220. @end example
  7221. @item
  7222. Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  7223. @example
  7224. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  7225. @end example
  7226. @end itemize
  7227. @section uspp
  7228. Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
  7229. the image at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{8} - all)
  7230. shifts and average the results.
  7231. The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
  7232. decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
  7233. DCT similar to MJPEG.
  7234. The filter accepts the following options:
  7235. @table @option
  7236. @item quality
  7237. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  7238. an integer in the range 0-8. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  7239. effect. A value of @code{8} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  7240. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  7241. @code{3}.
  7242. @item qp
  7243. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  7244. from the video stream (if available).
  7245. @end table
  7246. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  7247. @section vidstabdetect
  7248. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  7249. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  7250. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  7251. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  7252. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  7253. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  7254. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  7255. This filter accepts the following options:
  7256. @table @option
  7257. @item result
  7258. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  7259. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  7260. @item shakiness
  7261. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  7262. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  7263. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  7264. @item accuracy
  7265. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  7266. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  7267. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  7268. @item stepsize
  7269. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  7270. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  7271. @item mincontrast
  7272. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  7273. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  7274. value is 0.3.
  7275. @item tripod
  7276. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  7277. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  7278. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  7279. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  7280. the camera view absolutely still.
  7281. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  7282. @item show
  7283. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  7284. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  7285. visualization.
  7286. @end table
  7287. @subsection Examples
  7288. @itemize
  7289. @item
  7290. Use default values:
  7291. @example
  7292. vidstabdetect
  7293. @end example
  7294. @item
  7295. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  7296. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  7297. @example
  7298. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  7299. @end example
  7300. @item
  7301. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  7302. video:
  7303. @example
  7304. vidstabdetect=show=1
  7305. @end example
  7306. @item
  7307. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  7308. @example
  7309. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  7310. @end example
  7311. @end itemize
  7312. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  7313. @section vidstabtransform
  7314. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  7315. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  7316. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  7317. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  7318. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  7319. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  7320. the @ref{unsharp} filter, see below.
  7321. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  7322. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  7323. @subsection Options
  7324. @table @option
  7325. @item input
  7326. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  7327. @file{transforms.trf}.
  7328. @item smoothing
  7329. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  7330. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  7331. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  7332. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  7333. larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
  7334. the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
  7335. camera is simulated.
  7336. @item optalgo
  7337. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  7338. Accepted values are:
  7339. @table @samp
  7340. @item gauss
  7341. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  7342. @item avg
  7343. averaging on transformations
  7344. @end table
  7345. @item maxshift
  7346. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  7347. meaning no limit.
  7348. @item maxangle
  7349. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  7350. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  7351. @item crop
  7352. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  7353. compensation.
  7354. Available values are:
  7355. @table @samp
  7356. @item keep
  7357. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  7358. @item black
  7359. fill the border black
  7360. @end table
  7361. @item invert
  7362. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  7363. @item relative
  7364. Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
  7365. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  7366. @item zoom
  7367. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  7368. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  7369. zoom).
  7370. @item optzoom
  7371. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  7372. Accepted values are:
  7373. @table @samp
  7374. @item 0
  7375. disabled
  7376. @item 1
  7377. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  7378. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  7379. @item 2
  7380. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  7381. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  7382. @end table
  7383. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  7384. @item zoomspeed
  7385. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  7386. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  7387. 0.25.
  7388. @item interpol
  7389. Specify type of interpolation.
  7390. Available values are:
  7391. @table @samp
  7392. @item no
  7393. no interpolation
  7394. @item linear
  7395. linear only horizontal
  7396. @item bilinear
  7397. linear in both directions (default)
  7398. @item bicubic
  7399. cubic in both directions (slow)
  7400. @end table
  7401. @item tripod
  7402. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  7403. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  7404. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  7405. @item debug
  7406. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  7407. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  7408. value is 0.
  7409. @end table
  7410. @subsection Examples
  7411. @itemize
  7412. @item
  7413. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  7414. @example
  7415. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  7416. @end example
  7417. Note the use of the @ref{unsharp} filter which is always recommended.
  7418. @item
  7419. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  7420. @example
  7421. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  7422. @end example
  7423. @item
  7424. Smoothen the video even more:
  7425. @example
  7426. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  7427. @end example
  7428. @end itemize
  7429. @section vflip
  7430. Flip the input video vertically.
  7431. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7432. @example
  7433. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  7434. @end example
  7435. @anchor{vignette}
  7436. @section vignette
  7437. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  7438. The filter accepts the following options:
  7439. @table @option
  7440. @item angle, a
  7441. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  7442. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  7443. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  7444. @item x0
  7445. @item y0
  7446. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  7447. by default.
  7448. @item mode
  7449. Set forward/backward mode.
  7450. Available modes are:
  7451. @table @samp
  7452. @item forward
  7453. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  7454. @item backward
  7455. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  7456. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  7457. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  7458. also be used to create a burning effect.
  7459. @end table
  7460. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  7461. @item eval
  7462. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  7463. It accepts the following values:
  7464. @table @samp
  7465. @item init
  7466. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  7467. @item frame
  7468. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  7469. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  7470. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  7471. @end table
  7472. Default value is @samp{init}.
  7473. @item dither
  7474. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  7475. (enabled).
  7476. @item aspect
  7477. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  7478. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  7479. following the dimensions of the video.
  7480. Default is @code{1/1}.
  7481. @end table
  7482. @subsection Expressions
  7483. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  7484. following parameters.
  7485. @table @option
  7486. @item w
  7487. @item h
  7488. input width and height
  7489. @item n
  7490. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  7491. @item pts
  7492. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  7493. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  7494. @item r
  7495. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  7496. @item t
  7497. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7498. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  7499. @item tb
  7500. time base of the input video
  7501. @end table
  7502. @subsection Examples
  7503. @itemize
  7504. @item
  7505. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  7506. @example
  7507. vignette=PI/4
  7508. @end example
  7509. @item
  7510. Make a flickering vignetting:
  7511. @example
  7512. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  7513. @end example
  7514. @end itemize
  7515. @section w3fdif
  7516. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  7517. Deinterlacing Filter").
  7518. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  7519. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  7520. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  7521. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  7522. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  7523. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  7524. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  7525. @table @option
  7526. @item filter
  7527. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  7528. @table @samp
  7529. @item simple
  7530. Simple filter coefficient set.
  7531. @item complex
  7532. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  7533. @end table
  7534. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  7535. @item deint
  7536. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  7537. @table @samp
  7538. @item all
  7539. Deinterlace all frames,
  7540. @item interlaced
  7541. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7542. @end table
  7543. Default value is @samp{all}.
  7544. @end table
  7545. @section xbr
  7546. Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
  7547. art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
  7548. @url{http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134}.
  7549. It accepts the following option:
  7550. @table @option
  7551. @item n
  7552. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{2xBR}, @code{3} for
  7553. @code{3xBR} and @code{4} for @code{4xBR}.
  7554. Default is @code{3}.
  7555. @end table
  7556. @anchor{yadif}
  7557. @section yadif
  7558. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  7559. filter").
  7560. It accepts the following parameters:
  7561. @table @option
  7562. @item mode
  7563. The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
  7564. @table @option
  7565. @item 0, send_frame
  7566. Output one frame for each frame.
  7567. @item 1, send_field
  7568. Output one frame for each field.
  7569. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  7570. Like @code{send_frame}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7571. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  7572. Like @code{send_field}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7573. @end table
  7574. The default value is @code{send_frame}.
  7575. @item parity
  7576. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
  7577. of the following values:
  7578. @table @option
  7579. @item 0, tff
  7580. Assume the top field is first.
  7581. @item 1, bff
  7582. Assume the bottom field is first.
  7583. @item -1, auto
  7584. Enable automatic detection of field parity.
  7585. @end table
  7586. The default value is @code{auto}.
  7587. If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
  7588. top field first will be assumed.
  7589. @item deint
  7590. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  7591. values:
  7592. @table @option
  7593. @item 0, all
  7594. Deinterlace all frames.
  7595. @item 1, interlaced
  7596. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7597. @end table
  7598. The default value is @code{all}.
  7599. @end table
  7600. @section zoompan
  7601. Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
  7602. This filter accepts the following options:
  7603. @table @option
  7604. @item zoom, z
  7605. Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
  7606. @item x
  7607. @item y
  7608. Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
  7609. @item d
  7610. Set the duration expression in number of frames.
  7611. This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
  7612. single input image.
  7613. @item s
  7614. Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.
  7615. @end table
  7616. Each expression can contain the following constants:
  7617. @table @option
  7618. @item in_w, iw
  7619. Input width.
  7620. @item in_h, ih
  7621. Input height.
  7622. @item out_w, ow
  7623. Output width.
  7624. @item out_h, oh
  7625. Output height.
  7626. @item in
  7627. Input frame count.
  7628. @item on
  7629. Output frame count.
  7630. @item x
  7631. @item y
  7632. Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
  7633. for current input frame.
  7634. @item px
  7635. @item py
  7636. 'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
  7637. not yet such frame (first input frame).
  7638. @item zoom
  7639. Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.
  7640. @item pzoom
  7641. Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
  7642. @item duration
  7643. Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
  7644. for each input frame.
  7645. @item pduration
  7646. number of output frames created for previous input frame
  7647. @item a
  7648. Rational number: input width / input height
  7649. @item sar
  7650. sample aspect ratio
  7651. @item dar
  7652. display aspect ratio
  7653. @end table
  7654. @subsection Examples
  7655. @itemize
  7656. @item
  7657. Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
  7658. @example
  7659. zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
  7660. @end example
  7661. @end itemize
  7662. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  7663. @chapter Video Sources
  7664. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  7665. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  7666. @section buffer
  7667. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  7668. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  7669. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  7670. It accepts the following parameters:
  7671. @table @option
  7672. @item video_size
  7673. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  7674. syntax of this option, check the
  7675. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  7676. @item width
  7677. The input video width.
  7678. @item height
  7679. The input video height.
  7680. @item pix_fmt
  7681. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  7682. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  7683. name.
  7684. @item time_base
  7685. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  7686. @item frame_rate
  7687. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  7688. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  7689. The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
  7690. @item sws_param
  7691. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  7692. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  7693. input size or format.
  7694. @end table
  7695. For example:
  7696. @example
  7697. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  7698. @end example
  7699. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  7700. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  7701. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  7702. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  7703. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  7704. this example corresponds to:
  7705. @example
  7706. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  7707. @end example
  7708. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  7709. syntax is deprecated:
  7710. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  7711. @section cellauto
  7712. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  7713. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  7714. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  7715. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  7716. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  7717. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  7718. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  7719. This source accepts the following options:
  7720. @table @option
  7721. @item filename, f
  7722. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7723. the specified file.
  7724. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  7725. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7726. file will be ignored.
  7727. @item pattern, p
  7728. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7729. the specified string.
  7730. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  7731. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7732. string will be ignored.
  7733. @item rate, r
  7734. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7735. Default is 25.
  7736. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7737. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  7738. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  7739. 1/PHI.
  7740. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  7741. @item random_seed, seed
  7742. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  7743. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7744. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7745. effort basis.
  7746. @item rule
  7747. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  7748. Default value is 110.
  7749. @item size, s
  7750. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7751. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  7752. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  7753. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  7754. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  7755. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  7756. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  7757. larger row.
  7758. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  7759. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  7760. @item scroll
  7761. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  7762. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  7763. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  7764. Defaults to 1.
  7765. @item start_full, full
  7766. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  7767. outputting the first frame.
  7768. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7769. @item stitch
  7770. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  7771. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7772. @end table
  7773. @subsection Examples
  7774. @itemize
  7775. @item
  7776. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  7777. size 200x400.
  7778. @example
  7779. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  7780. @end example
  7781. @item
  7782. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  7783. ratio of 2/3:
  7784. @example
  7785. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7786. @end example
  7787. @item
  7788. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  7789. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  7790. @example
  7791. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7792. @end example
  7793. @item
  7794. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  7795. @example
  7796. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7797. @end example
  7798. @end itemize
  7799. @section mandelbrot
  7800. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  7801. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  7802. This source accepts the following options:
  7803. @table @option
  7804. @item end_pts
  7805. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  7806. @item end_scale
  7807. Set the terminal scale value.
  7808. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  7809. @item inner
  7810. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  7811. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  7812. It shall assume one of the following values:
  7813. @table @option
  7814. @item black
  7815. Set black mode.
  7816. @item convergence
  7817. Show time until convergence.
  7818. @item mincol
  7819. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  7820. @item period
  7821. Set period mode.
  7822. @end table
  7823. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  7824. @item bailout
  7825. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  7826. @item maxiter
  7827. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  7828. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  7829. @item outer
  7830. Set outer coloring mode.
  7831. It shall assume one of following values:
  7832. @table @option
  7833. @item iteration_count
  7834. Set iteration cound mode.
  7835. @item normalized_iteration_count
  7836. set normalized iteration count mode.
  7837. @end table
  7838. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  7839. @item rate, r
  7840. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  7841. value is "25".
  7842. @item size, s
  7843. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  7844. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  7845. @item start_scale
  7846. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  7847. @item start_x
  7848. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  7849. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  7850. @item start_y
  7851. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  7852. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  7853. @end table
  7854. @section mptestsrc
  7855. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  7856. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  7857. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  7858. This source accepts the following options:
  7859. @table @option
  7860. @item rate, r
  7861. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7862. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7863. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7864. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7865. "25".
  7866. @item duration, d
  7867. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7868. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7869. for the accepted syntax.
  7870. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7871. supposed to be generated forever.
  7872. @item test, t
  7873. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  7874. @table @option
  7875. @item dc_luma
  7876. @item dc_chroma
  7877. @item freq_luma
  7878. @item freq_chroma
  7879. @item amp_luma
  7880. @item amp_chroma
  7881. @item cbp
  7882. @item mv
  7883. @item ring1
  7884. @item ring2
  7885. @item all
  7886. @end table
  7887. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  7888. @end table
  7889. Some examples:
  7890. @example
  7891. mptestsrc=t=dc_luma
  7892. @end example
  7893. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  7894. @section frei0r_src
  7895. Provide a frei0r source.
  7896. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  7897. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  7898. This source accepts the following parameters:
  7899. @table @option
  7900. @item size
  7901. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7902. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  7903. @item framerate
  7904. The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
  7905. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  7906. @item filter_name
  7907. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  7908. how to set the parameters, read the @ref{frei0r} section in the video filters
  7909. documentation.
  7910. @item filter_params
  7911. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  7912. @end table
  7913. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  7914. and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
  7915. @example
  7916. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  7917. @end example
  7918. @section life
  7919. Generate a life pattern.
  7920. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  7921. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  7922. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  7923. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  7924. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  7925. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  7926. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  7927. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows one to specify
  7928. the rule to adopt.
  7929. This source accepts the following options:
  7930. @table @option
  7931. @item filename, f
  7932. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  7933. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  7934. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  7935. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  7936. randomly.
  7937. @item rate, r
  7938. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7939. Default is 25.
  7940. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7941. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  7942. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  7943. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  7944. @item random_seed, seed
  7945. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  7946. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7947. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7948. effort basis.
  7949. @item rule
  7950. Set the life rule.
  7951. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  7952. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  7953. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  7954. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  7955. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  7956. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  7957. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  7958. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  7959. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  7960. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  7961. higher number of neighbor cells.
  7962. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  7963. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  7964. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  7965. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  7966. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  7967. a dead cell.
  7968. @item size, s
  7969. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7970. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  7971. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  7972. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  7973. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  7974. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  7975. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  7976. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  7977. @item stitch
  7978. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  7979. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  7980. @item mold
  7981. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  7982. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  7983. value from 0 to 255.
  7984. @item life_color
  7985. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  7986. @item death_color
  7987. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  7988. used to represent a dead cell.
  7989. @item mold_color
  7990. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  7991. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  7992. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7993. @end table
  7994. @subsection Examples
  7995. @itemize
  7996. @item
  7997. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  7998. 300x300 pixels:
  7999. @example
  8000. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  8001. @end example
  8002. @item
  8003. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  8004. @example
  8005. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  8006. @end example
  8007. @item
  8008. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  8009. @example
  8010. life=rule=S14/B34
  8011. @end example
  8012. @item
  8013. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  8014. @example
  8015. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  8016. @end example
  8017. @end itemize
  8018. @anchor{color}
  8019. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  8020. @anchor{nullsrc}
  8021. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  8022. @anchor{smptebars}
  8023. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  8024. @anchor{testsrc}
  8025. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  8026. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  8027. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  8028. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  8029. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  8030. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  8031. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  8032. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  8033. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  8034. stripe from top to bottom.
  8035. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  8036. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  8037. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  8038. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  8039. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  8040. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  8041. intended for testing purposes.
  8042. The sources accept the following parameters:
  8043. @table @option
  8044. @item color, c
  8045. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  8046. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  8047. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  8048. @item level
  8049. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  8050. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  8051. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  8052. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  8053. @item size, s
  8054. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  8055. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  8056. The default value is @code{320x240}.
  8057. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  8058. @item rate, r
  8059. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  8060. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  8061. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  8062. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  8063. "25".
  8064. @item sar
  8065. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  8066. @item duration, d
  8067. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  8068. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  8069. for the accepted syntax.
  8070. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  8071. supposed to be generated forever.
  8072. @item decimals, n
  8073. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  8074. @code{testsrc} source.
  8075. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  8076. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  8077. value. Default value is 0.
  8078. @end table
  8079. For example the following:
  8080. @example
  8081. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  8082. @end example
  8083. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  8084. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  8085. The following graph description will generate a red source
  8086. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  8087. frames per second.
  8088. @example
  8089. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  8090. @end example
  8091. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  8092. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  8093. the @code{geq} filter:
  8094. @example
  8095. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  8096. @end example
  8097. @subsection Commands
  8098. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  8099. @table @option
  8100. @item c, color
  8101. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  8102. corresponding @option{color} option.
  8103. @end table
  8104. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  8105. @chapter Video Sinks
  8106. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  8107. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  8108. @section buffersink
  8109. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  8110. graph.
  8111. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  8112. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  8113. or the options system.
  8114. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  8115. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  8116. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  8117. @section nullsink
  8118. Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  8119. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  8120. tools.
  8121. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  8122. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  8123. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  8124. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  8125. @section avectorscope
  8126. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  8127. scope.
  8128. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  8129. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  8130. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  8131. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  8132. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  8133. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  8134. The filter accepts the following options:
  8135. @table @option
  8136. @item mode, m
  8137. Set the vectorscope mode.
  8138. Available values are:
  8139. @table @samp
  8140. @item lissajous
  8141. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  8142. @item lissajous_xy
  8143. Same as above but not rotated.
  8144. @end table
  8145. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  8146. @item size, s
  8147. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
  8148. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  8149. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  8150. @item rate, r
  8151. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  8152. @item rc
  8153. @item gc
  8154. @item bc
  8155. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  8156. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  8157. @item rf
  8158. @item gf
  8159. @item bf
  8160. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  8161. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  8162. @item zoom
  8163. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  8164. @end table
  8165. @subsection Examples
  8166. @itemize
  8167. @item
  8168. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  8169. @example
  8170. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  8171. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  8172. @end example
  8173. @end itemize
  8174. @section concat
  8175. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  8176. other.
  8177. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  8178. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  8179. also be the number of streams at output.
  8180. The filter accepts the following options:
  8181. @table @option
  8182. @item n
  8183. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  8184. @item v
  8185. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  8186. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  8187. @item a
  8188. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
  8189. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  8190. @item unsafe
  8191. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  8192. @end table
  8193. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  8194. @var{a} audio outputs.
  8195. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  8196. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  8197. segment, etc.
  8198. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  8199. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  8200. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  8201. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  8202. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  8203. audio streams with silence.
  8204. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  8205. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  8206. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  8207. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  8208. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  8209. explicitly by the user.
  8210. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  8211. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  8212. @subsection Examples
  8213. @itemize
  8214. @item
  8215. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  8216. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  8217. @example
  8218. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  8219. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  8220. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  8221. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  8222. @end example
  8223. @item
  8224. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  8225. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  8226. @example
  8227. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  8228. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  8229. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  8230. @end example
  8231. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  8232. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  8233. @end itemize
  8234. @section ebur128
  8235. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  8236. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  8237. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  8238. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  8239. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  8240. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  8241. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  8242. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  8243. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  8244. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  8245. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  8246. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  8247. The filter accepts the following options:
  8248. @table @option
  8249. @item video
  8250. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  8251. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  8252. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  8253. @item size
  8254. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  8255. option, check the
  8256. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  8257. Default and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  8258. @item meter
  8259. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  8260. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  8261. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  8262. @item metadata
  8263. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  8264. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  8265. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  8266. Default is @code{0}.
  8267. @item framelog
  8268. Force the frame logging level.
  8269. Available values are:
  8270. @table @samp
  8271. @item info
  8272. information logging level
  8273. @item verbose
  8274. verbose logging level
  8275. @end table
  8276. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  8277. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  8278. @item peak
  8279. Set peak mode(s).
  8280. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  8281. values are:
  8282. @table @samp
  8283. @item none
  8284. Disable any peak mode (default).
  8285. @item sample
  8286. Enable sample-peak mode.
  8287. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  8288. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  8289. @item true
  8290. Enable true-peak mode.
  8291. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  8292. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  8293. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  8294. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  8295. @end table
  8296. @end table
  8297. @subsection Examples
  8298. @itemize
  8299. @item
  8300. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  8301. @example
  8302. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  8303. @end example
  8304. @item
  8305. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  8306. @example
  8307. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  8308. @end example
  8309. @end itemize
  8310. @section interleave, ainterleave
  8311. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  8312. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  8313. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  8314. queued frame to the output.
  8315. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  8316. timestamp values.
  8317. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  8318. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  8319. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  8320. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  8321. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  8322. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  8323. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  8324. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  8325. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  8326. the queue is already filled.
  8327. These filters accept the following options:
  8328. @table @option
  8329. @item nb_inputs, n
  8330. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  8331. @end table
  8332. @subsection Examples
  8333. @itemize
  8334. @item
  8335. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  8336. @example
  8337. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  8338. @end example
  8339. @item
  8340. Add flickering blur effect:
  8341. @example
  8342. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  8343. @end example
  8344. @end itemize
  8345. @section perms, aperms
  8346. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  8347. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  8348. following filter in the filtergraph.
  8349. The filters accept the following options:
  8350. @table @option
  8351. @item mode
  8352. Select the permissions mode.
  8353. It accepts the following values:
  8354. @table @samp
  8355. @item none
  8356. Do nothing. This is the default.
  8357. @item ro
  8358. Set all the output frames read-only.
  8359. @item rw
  8360. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  8361. @item toggle
  8362. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  8363. @item random
  8364. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  8365. @end table
  8366. @item seed
  8367. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  8368. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  8369. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  8370. basis.
  8371. @end table
  8372. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  8373. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  8374. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  8375. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  8376. @section select, aselect
  8377. Select frames to pass in output.
  8378. This filter accepts the following options:
  8379. @table @option
  8380. @item expr, e
  8381. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  8382. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  8383. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  8384. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  8385. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  8386. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  8387. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  8388. @item outputs, n
  8389. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  8390. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  8391. @end table
  8392. The expression can contain the following constants:
  8393. @table @option
  8394. @item n
  8395. The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
  8396. @item selected_n
  8397. The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
  8398. @item prev_selected_n
  8399. The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8400. @item TB
  8401. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8402. @item pts
  8403. The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  8404. expressed in @var{TB} units. It's NAN if undefined.
  8405. @item t
  8406. The PTS of the filtered video frame,
  8407. expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.
  8408. @item prev_pts
  8409. The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8410. @item prev_selected_pts
  8411. The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8412. @item prev_selected_t
  8413. The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8414. @item start_pts
  8415. The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  8416. @item start_t
  8417. The time of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  8418. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  8419. The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
  8420. values:
  8421. @table @option
  8422. @item I
  8423. @item P
  8424. @item B
  8425. @item S
  8426. @item SI
  8427. @item SP
  8428. @item BI
  8429. @end table
  8430. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  8431. The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
  8432. @table @option
  8433. @item PROGRESSIVE
  8434. The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
  8435. @item TOPFIRST
  8436. The frame is top-field-first.
  8437. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  8438. The frame is bottom-field-first.
  8439. @end table
  8440. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  8441. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  8442. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  8443. the number of samples in the current frame
  8444. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  8445. the input sample rate
  8446. @item key
  8447. This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
  8448. @item pos
  8449. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  8450. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  8451. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  8452. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  8453. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  8454. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  8455. @end table
  8456. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  8457. @subsection Examples
  8458. @itemize
  8459. @item
  8460. Select all frames in input:
  8461. @example
  8462. select
  8463. @end example
  8464. The example above is the same as:
  8465. @example
  8466. select=1
  8467. @end example
  8468. @item
  8469. Skip all frames:
  8470. @example
  8471. select=0
  8472. @end example
  8473. @item
  8474. Select only I-frames:
  8475. @example
  8476. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  8477. @end example
  8478. @item
  8479. Select one frame every 100:
  8480. @example
  8481. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  8482. @end example
  8483. @item
  8484. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  8485. @example
  8486. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  8487. @end example
  8488. @item
  8489. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  8490. @example
  8491. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  8492. @end example
  8493. @item
  8494. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  8495. @example
  8496. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  8497. @end example
  8498. @item
  8499. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  8500. @example
  8501. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  8502. @end example
  8503. @item
  8504. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  8505. @example
  8506. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  8507. @end example
  8508. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  8509. choice.
  8510. @item
  8511. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  8512. @example
  8513. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  8514. @end example
  8515. @end itemize
  8516. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  8517. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  8518. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  8519. filtergraph.
  8520. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  8521. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  8522. from that they act the same way.
  8523. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  8524. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  8525. @var{filename} option.
  8526. These filters accept the following options:
  8527. @table @option
  8528. @item commands, c
  8529. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  8530. @item filename, f
  8531. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  8532. filters.
  8533. @end table
  8534. @subsection Commands syntax
  8535. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  8536. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  8537. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  8538. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  8539. interval.
  8540. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  8541. @example
  8542. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  8543. @end example
  8544. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  8545. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  8546. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  8547. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  8548. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  8549. @var{END}.
  8550. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  8551. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  8552. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  8553. @example
  8554. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  8555. @end example
  8556. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  8557. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  8558. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  8559. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  8560. The following flags are recognized:
  8561. @table @option
  8562. @item enter
  8563. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  8564. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8565. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  8566. current is.
  8567. @item leave
  8568. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  8569. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8570. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  8571. current is not.
  8572. @end table
  8573. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  8574. assumed.
  8575. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8576. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8577. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8578. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  8579. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  8580. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  8581. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  8582. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  8583. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  8584. follows:
  8585. @example
  8586. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  8587. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  8588. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8589. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  8590. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  8591. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  8592. @end example
  8593. @subsection Examples
  8594. @itemize
  8595. @item
  8596. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  8597. @example
  8598. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  8599. @end example
  8600. @item
  8601. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  8602. @example
  8603. # show text in the interval 5-10
  8604. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  8605. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  8606. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  8607. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  8608. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  8609. [leave] hue s 1,
  8610. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  8611. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  8612. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  8613. @end example
  8614. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  8615. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  8616. @example
  8617. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  8618. @end example
  8619. @end itemize
  8620. @anchor{setpts}
  8621. @section setpts, asetpts
  8622. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  8623. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  8624. This filter accepts the following options:
  8625. @table @option
  8626. @item expr
  8627. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  8628. @end table
  8629. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  8630. constants:
  8631. @table @option
  8632. @item FRAME_RATE
  8633. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  8634. @item PTS
  8635. The presentation timestamp in input
  8636. @item N
  8637. The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  8638. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  8639. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  8640. The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  8641. audio)
  8642. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  8643. The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  8644. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  8645. The audio sample rate.
  8646. @item STARTPTS
  8647. The PTS of the first frame.
  8648. @item STARTT
  8649. the time in seconds of the first frame
  8650. @item INTERLACED
  8651. State whether the current frame is interlaced.
  8652. @item T
  8653. the time in seconds of the current frame
  8654. @item POS
  8655. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  8656. for the current frame
  8657. @item PREV_INPTS
  8658. The previous input PTS.
  8659. @item PREV_INT
  8660. previous input time in seconds
  8661. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  8662. The previous output PTS.
  8663. @item PREV_OUTT
  8664. previous output time in seconds
  8665. @item RTCTIME
  8666. The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  8667. instead.
  8668. @item RTCSTART
  8669. The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
  8670. @item TB
  8671. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8672. @end table
  8673. @subsection Examples
  8674. @itemize
  8675. @item
  8676. Start counting PTS from zero
  8677. @example
  8678. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  8679. @end example
  8680. @item
  8681. Apply fast motion effect:
  8682. @example
  8683. setpts=0.5*PTS
  8684. @end example
  8685. @item
  8686. Apply slow motion effect:
  8687. @example
  8688. setpts=2.0*PTS
  8689. @end example
  8690. @item
  8691. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  8692. @example
  8693. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  8694. @end example
  8695. @item
  8696. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  8697. @example
  8698. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  8699. @end example
  8700. @item
  8701. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  8702. @example
  8703. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  8704. @end example
  8705. @item
  8706. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  8707. @example
  8708. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  8709. @end example
  8710. @item
  8711. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  8712. @example
  8713. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  8714. @end example
  8715. @end itemize
  8716. @section settb, asettb
  8717. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  8718. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  8719. It accepts the following parameters:
  8720. @table @option
  8721. @item expr, tb
  8722. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  8723. @end table
  8724. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  8725. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  8726. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  8727. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  8728. @subsection Examples
  8729. @itemize
  8730. @item
  8731. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  8732. @example
  8733. settb=expr=1/25
  8734. @end example
  8735. @item
  8736. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  8737. @example
  8738. settb=expr=0.1
  8739. @end example
  8740. @item
  8741. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  8742. @example
  8743. settb=1+0.001
  8744. @end example
  8745. @item
  8746. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  8747. @example
  8748. settb=2*intb
  8749. @end example
  8750. @item
  8751. Set the default timebase value:
  8752. @example
  8753. settb=AVTB
  8754. @end example
  8755. @end itemize
  8756. @section showcqt
  8757. Convert input audio to a video output representing
  8758. frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
  8759. Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
  8760. The filter accepts the following options:
  8761. @table @option
  8762. @item volume
  8763. Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
  8764. variables:
  8765. @table @option
  8766. @item frequency, freq, f
  8767. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8768. @item timeclamp, tc
  8769. value of timeclamp option
  8770. @end table
  8771. and functions:
  8772. @table @option
  8773. @item a_weighting(f)
  8774. A-weighting of equal loudness
  8775. @item b_weighting(f)
  8776. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8777. @item c_weighting(f)
  8778. C-weighting of equal loudness
  8779. @end table
  8780. Default value is @code{16}.
  8781. @item tlength
  8782. Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
  8783. @table @option
  8784. @item frequency, freq, f
  8785. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8786. @item timeclamp, tc
  8787. value of timeclamp option
  8788. @end table
  8789. Default value is @code{384/f*tc/(384/f+tc)}.
  8790. @item timeclamp
  8791. Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
  8792. accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
  8793. event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
  8794. otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
  8795. (such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is @code{0.17}.
  8796. @item coeffclamp
  8797. Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
  8798. more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
  8799. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  8800. @item gamma
  8801. Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
  8802. makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  8803. Default value is @code{3.0}.
  8804. @item gamma2
  8805. Specify gamma of bargraph. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  8806. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  8807. @item fontfile
  8808. Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
  8809. @item fontcolor
  8810. Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
  8811. integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
  8812. @table @option
  8813. @item frequency, freq, f
  8814. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8815. @item timeclamp, tc
  8816. value of timeclamp option
  8817. @end table
  8818. and functions:
  8819. @table @option
  8820. @item midi(f)
  8821. midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
  8822. @item r(x), g(x), b(x)
  8823. red, green, and blue value of intensity x
  8824. @end table
  8825. Default value is @code{st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
  8826. st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
  8827. r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))}
  8828. @item fullhd
  8829. If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
  8830. if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
  8831. @item fps
  8832. Specify video fps. Default value is @code{25}.
  8833. @item count
  8834. Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
  8835. per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
  8836. Default value is @code{6}.
  8837. @end table
  8838. @subsection Examples
  8839. @itemize
  8840. @item
  8841. Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
  8842. @example
  8843. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8844. @end example
  8845. @item
  8846. Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
  8847. @example
  8848. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
  8849. @end example
  8850. @item
  8851. Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
  8852. @example
  8853. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
  8854. @end example
  8855. @item
  8856. A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
  8857. @example
  8858. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8859. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8860. @end example
  8861. @item
  8862. Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
  8863. @example
  8864. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8865. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
  8866. @end example
  8867. @item
  8868. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8869. @example
  8870. volume=16*b_weighting(f)
  8871. @end example
  8872. @item
  8873. Lower Q factor
  8874. @example
  8875. tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
  8876. @end example
  8877. @item
  8878. Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
  8879. @example
  8880. fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
  8881. @end example
  8882. @item
  8883. Custom gamma, now spectrum is linear to the amplitude.
  8884. @example
  8885. gamma=2:gamma2=2
  8886. @end example
  8887. @end itemize
  8888. @section showspectrum
  8889. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  8890. spectrum.
  8891. The filter accepts the following options:
  8892. @table @option
  8893. @item size, s
  8894. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
  8895. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  8896. Default value is @code{640x512}.
  8897. @item slide
  8898. Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
  8899. It accepts the following values:
  8900. @table @samp
  8901. @item replace
  8902. the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
  8903. @item scroll
  8904. the samples scroll from right to left
  8905. @item fullframe
  8906. frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
  8907. @end table
  8908. Default value is @code{replace}.
  8909. @item mode
  8910. Specify display mode.
  8911. It accepts the following values:
  8912. @table @samp
  8913. @item combined
  8914. all channels are displayed in the same row
  8915. @item separate
  8916. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  8917. @end table
  8918. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  8919. @item color
  8920. Specify display color mode.
  8921. It accepts the following values:
  8922. @table @samp
  8923. @item channel
  8924. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  8925. @item intensity
  8926. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  8927. @end table
  8928. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  8929. @item scale
  8930. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  8931. It accepts the following values:
  8932. @table @samp
  8933. @item lin
  8934. linear
  8935. @item sqrt
  8936. square root, default
  8937. @item cbrt
  8938. cubic root
  8939. @item log
  8940. logarithmic
  8941. @end table
  8942. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  8943. @item saturation
  8944. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  8945. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  8946. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  8947. Default value is @code{1}.
  8948. @item win_func
  8949. Set window function.
  8950. It accepts the following values:
  8951. @table @samp
  8952. @item none
  8953. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  8954. @item hann
  8955. Hann window
  8956. @item hamming
  8957. Hamming window
  8958. @item blackman
  8959. Blackman window
  8960. @end table
  8961. Default value is @code{hann}.
  8962. @end table
  8963. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  8964. section.
  8965. @subsection Examples
  8966. @itemize
  8967. @item
  8968. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  8969. @example
  8970. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  8971. @end example
  8972. @item
  8973. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  8974. @example
  8975. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  8976. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  8977. @end example
  8978. @end itemize
  8979. @section showwaves
  8980. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  8981. The filter accepts the following options:
  8982. @table @option
  8983. @item size, s
  8984. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
  8985. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  8986. Default value is @code{600x240}.
  8987. @item mode
  8988. Set display mode.
  8989. Available values are:
  8990. @table @samp
  8991. @item point
  8992. Draw a point for each sample.
  8993. @item line
  8994. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  8995. @item p2p
  8996. Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
  8997. @item cline
  8998. Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
  8999. @end table
  9000. Default value is @code{point}.
  9001. @item n
  9002. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  9003. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  9004. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  9005. is not explicitly specified.
  9006. @item rate, r
  9007. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  9008. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  9009. @item split_channels
  9010. Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
  9011. @end table
  9012. @subsection Examples
  9013. @itemize
  9014. @item
  9015. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  9016. at the same time:
  9017. @example
  9018. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  9019. @end example
  9020. @item
  9021. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  9022. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  9023. @example
  9024. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  9025. @end example
  9026. @end itemize
  9027. @section showwavespic
  9028. Convert input audio to a single video frame, representing the samples waves.
  9029. The filter accepts the following options:
  9030. @table @option
  9031. @item size, s
  9032. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
  9033. @ref{video size syntax,,"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  9034. Default value is @code{600x240}.
  9035. @item split_channels
  9036. Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
  9037. @end table
  9038. @subsection Examples
  9039. @itemize
  9040. @item
  9041. Extract a channel split representation of the wave form of a whole audio track
  9042. in a 1024x800 picture using @command{ffmpeg}:
  9043. @example
  9044. ffmpeg -i audio.flac -lavfi showwavespic=split_channels=1:s=1024x800 waveform.png
  9045. @end example
  9046. @end itemize
  9047. @section split, asplit
  9048. Split input into several identical outputs.
  9049. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  9050. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  9051. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  9052. @subsection Examples
  9053. @itemize
  9054. @item
  9055. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  9056. @example
  9057. [in] split [out0][out1]
  9058. @end example
  9059. @item
  9060. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  9061. outputs, like in:
  9062. @example
  9063. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  9064. @end example
  9065. @item
  9066. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  9067. one padded:
  9068. @example
  9069. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  9070. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  9071. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  9072. @end example
  9073. @item
  9074. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  9075. @example
  9076. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  9077. @end example
  9078. @end itemize
  9079. @section zmq, azmq
  9080. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  9081. filters in the filtergraph.
  9082. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  9083. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  9084. audio filters.
  9085. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  9086. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  9087. For more information about libzmq see:
  9088. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  9089. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  9090. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  9091. @option{bind_address} option.
  9092. The received message must be in the form:
  9093. @example
  9094. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  9095. @end example
  9096. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  9097. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  9098. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  9099. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  9100. given @var{COMMAND}.
  9101. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  9102. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  9103. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  9104. @example
  9105. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  9106. @var{MESSAGE}
  9107. @end example
  9108. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  9109. @subsection Examples
  9110. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  9111. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  9112. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  9113. @example
  9114. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  9115. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  9116. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  9117. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  9118. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  9119. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  9120. @end example
  9121. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  9122. command can be used:
  9123. @example
  9124. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  9125. @end example
  9126. To change the right side:
  9127. @example
  9128. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  9129. @end example
  9130. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  9131. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  9132. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  9133. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  9134. @section amovie
  9135. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  9136. stream by default.
  9137. @anchor{movie}
  9138. @section movie
  9139. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  9140. It accepts the following parameters:
  9141. @table @option
  9142. @item filename
  9143. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
  9144. device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
  9145. @item format_name, f
  9146. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  9147. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
  9148. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  9149. @item seek_point, sp
  9150. Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
  9151. starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
  9152. @code{av_strtod}, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  9153. postfix. The default value is "0".
  9154. @item streams, s
  9155. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  9156. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  9157. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  9158. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  9159. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  9160. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  9161. @item stream_index, si
  9162. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  9163. the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
  9164. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  9165. audio instead of video.
  9166. @item loop
  9167. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  9168. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  9169. Default value is "1".
  9170. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  9171. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  9172. @end table
  9173. It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
  9174. a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
  9175. @example
  9176. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  9177. ^
  9178. |
  9179. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  9180. @end example
  9181. @subsection Examples
  9182. @itemize
  9183. @item
  9184. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
  9185. on top of the input labelled "in":
  9186. @example
  9187. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  9188. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  9189. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  9190. @end example
  9191. @item
  9192. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  9193. labelled "in":
  9194. @example
  9195. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  9196. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  9197. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  9198. @end example
  9199. @item
  9200. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  9201. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  9202. connected to the pad named "audio":
  9203. @example
  9204. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  9205. @end example
  9206. @end itemize
  9207. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES